initial commit of ebook 23770HEAD main

author: Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> 2025-10-15 02:10:02 -0700
committer: Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> 2025-10-15 02:10:02 -0700
commit: 968d5a00099759360b1055baa8d5bcc6636d5e2f (patch)
tree: 0d1eb7cccdd91eac9f9095039591dcef8763440c
238 files changed, 6097 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/23770-h.zip b/23770-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d93d51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h.zip
diff --git a/23770-h/23770-h.htm b/23770-h/23770-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb64dfa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/23770-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,3295 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+  <head>
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" />
+    <title>
+      The Project Gutenberg eBook of Mission Furniture, How To Make It,
+      Part I, by H.H. Windsor.
+    </title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+/*<![CDATA[  XML blockout */
+<!--
+    p {  margin-top: .75em;
+         text-align: justify;
+         margin-bottom: .75em;
+         }
+    h1,h2,h3 {
+         text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+         clear: both;
+         }
+    hr { width: 33%;
+	 margin-top: 2em;
+	 margin-bottom: 2em;
+         margin-left: auto;
+         margin-right: auto;
+         clear: both;
+       }
+    ul  { list-style-type:none;}
+     .toc {margin-left: 10%; text-align: right}
+
+    body{margin-left: 10%;
+         margin-right: 10%;
+        }
+
+    .pagenum  { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */
+            /*  visibility: hidden;  */
+                position: absolute;
+                left: 92%;
+                font-size: smaller;
+                text-align: right;
+              } /* page numbers */
+
+        .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;}
+
+    .bb       {border-bottom: solid 2px;}
+    .bl       {border-left: solid 2px;}
+    .bt       {border-top: solid 2px;}
+    .br       {border-right: solid 2px;}
+    .bbox     {border: solid 2px;}
+
+    .center   {text-align: center;}
+    .smcap    {font-variant: small-caps;}
+
+    .caption  {font-weight: bold;}
+
+    .figcenter   {margin: auto; text-align: center; margin-top: 3em;}
+
+    /* XML end  ]]>*/
+    </style>
+  </head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Mission Furniture, by H. H. Windsor
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Mission Furniture
+       How to Make It, Part I
+
+Author: H. H. Windsor
+
+Release Date: December 8, 2007 [EBook #23770]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MISSION FURNITURE ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by K. Nordquist, Ross Wilburn and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+
+
+<h1>
+<span class="smcap">Mission Furniture</span></h1>
+
+<h2>HOW TO MAKE IT</h2>
+
+<h2>PART I</h2>
+
+<hr style="width: 25%;" />
+<h2>POPULAR MECHANICS HANDBOOKS</h2>
+
+<hr style="width: 25%;" />
+<h3>CHICAGO</h3>
+
+
+<h3>POPULAR MECHANICS CO.</h3>
+
+
+
+<h3>Copyrighted, 1909,<br />
+by H.H. WINDSOR</h3>
+
+<hr style="width: 45%;" />
+<p>This book is one of the series of
+Handbooks on industrial subjects
+being published by the Popular
+Mechanics Company.</p>
+
+<p>Like Popular Mechanics Magazine,
+and like the other books in this series,
+it is "written so you can understand it."</p>
+
+<p>The purpose of Popular Mechanics
+Handbooks is to supply a growing
+demand for high-class, up-to-date and
+accurate text-books, suitable for home
+study as well as for class use, on all
+mechanical subjects.</p>
+
+<p>The text and illustrations, in each
+instance, have been prepared expressly
+for this series by well known experts,
+and revised by the editor of Popular
+Mechanics.</p>
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2>CONTENTS</h2>
+
+<ul class="TOC">
+<li><a href="#HOME-MADE_MISSION_CHAIR"><b>HOME-MADE MISSION CHAIR</b></a>, 5</li>
+<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_A_LAMP_STAND_AND"><b>HOW TO MAKE A LAMP STAND AND</b></a>, 8</li>
+<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_A_PORCH_CHAIR"><b>HOW TO MAKE A PORCH CHAIR</b></a>, 15</li>
+<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_A_TABOURET"><b>HOW TO MAKE A TABOURET</b></a>, 17</li>
+<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_A_MORRIS_CHAIR"><b>HOW TO MAKE A MORRIS CHAIR</b></a>, 22</li>
+<li><a href="#HOME-MADE_MISSION_BOOK_RACK"><b>HOME-MADE MISSION BOOK RACK</b></a>, 27</li>
+<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_A_MISSION_LIBRARY"><b>HOW TO MAKE A MISSION LIBRARY</b></a>, 29</li>
+<li><a href="#HOME-MADE_MISSION_CANDLESTICK"><b>HOME-MADE MISSION CANDLESTICK</b></a>, 35</li>
+<li><a href="#ANOTHER_STYLE_OF_MISSION_CHAIR"><b>ANOTHER STYLE OF MISSION CHAIR</b></a>, 36</li>
+<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_AND_FINISH_A_MAGAZINE"><b>HOW TO MAKE AND FINISH A MAGAZINE</b></a>, 42</li>
+<li><a href="#HOME-MADE_LAWN_SWING"><b>HOME-MADE LAWN SWING</b></a>, 47</li>
+<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_A_PORTABLE_TABLE"><b>HOW TO MAKE A PORTABLE TABLE</b></a>, 50</li>
+<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_A_COMBINATION_BILLIARD"><b>HOW TO MAKE A COMBINATION BILLIARD</b></a>, 51</li>
+<li><a href="#EASILY_MADE_BOOK_SHELVES"><b>EASILY MADE BOOK SHELVES</b></a>, 56</li>
+<li><a href="#A_BLACKING_CASE_TABOURET"><b>A BLACKING CASE TABOURET</b></a>, 57</li>
+<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_A_ROLL_TOP_DESK"><b>HOW TO MAKE A ROLL TOP DESK</b></a>, 62</li>
+<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_A_ROMAN_CHAIR"><b>HOW TO MAKE A ROMAN CHAIR</b></a>, 67</li>
+<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_A_SETTEE"><b>HOW TO MAKE A SETTEE</b></a>, 70</li>
+<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_A_PYROGRAPHERS_TABLE"><b>HOW TO MAKE A PYROGRAPHER'S TABLE</b></a>, 74</li>
+<li><a href="#MISSION_STAINS"><b>MISSION STAINS</b></a>, 76</li>
+<li><a href="#FILLING_OAK"><b>FILLING OAK</b></a>, 77</li>
+<li><a href="#WAX_FINISHING"><b>WAX FINISHING</b></a>, 78</li>
+<li><a href="#THE_FUMING_OF_OAK"><b>THE FUMING OF OAK</b></a>, 78</li>
+<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_BLACK_WAX"><b>HOW TO MAKE BLACK WAX</b></a>, 78</li>
+<li><a href="#THE_40_STYLES_OF_CHAIRS"><b>THE 40 STYLES OF CHAIRS</b></a>, 80</li>
+<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_A_PIANO_BENCH"><b>HOW TO MAKE A PIANO BENCH</b></a>, 87</li>
+<li><a href="#HOW_TO_MAKE_A_MISSION_SHAVING"><b>HOW TO MAKE A MISSION SHAVING</b></a>, 89</li>
+<li><a href="#A_MISSION_WASTE-PAPER_BASKET"><b>A MISSION WASTE-PAPER BASKET</b></a>, 93</li>
+<li><a href="#A_CELLARETTE_PEDESTAL"><b>A CELLARETTE PEDESTAL</b></a>, 96</li>
+<li><a href="#A_DRESSER"><b>A DRESSER</b></a>, 100</li>
+<li><a href="#A_MISSION_SIDEBOARD"><b>A MISSION SIDEBOARD</b></a>, 103</li>
+<li><a href="#A_HALL_OR_WINDOW_SEAT"><b>A HALL OR WINDOW SEAT</b></a>, 107</li>
+<li><a href="#A_MISSION_PLANT_STAND"><b>A MISSION PLANT STAND</b></a>, 109</li>
+<li><a href="#A_BEDSIDE_MEDICINE_STAND"><b>A BEDSIDE MEDICINE STAND</b></a>, 112</li>
+<li><a href="#A_MISSION_HALL_CHAIR"><b>A MISSION HALL CHAIR</b></a>, 115</li>
+</ul>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2> LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS</h2>
+<ul>
+<li><a href="images/i-004.jpg">Suitable for Dining Room Use,</a> 5</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-006.jpg">Details of Chair Construction,</a> 6</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-009.jpg">The Completed Lamp,</a> 9</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-011.jpg">Construction of Shade,</a> 11</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-012.jpg">Details of Construction of Library Lamp Stand,</a> 12</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-014.jpg">Details of Home-Made Porch Seat,</a> 14</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-016.jpg">Porch Chair Finished,</a> 16</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-018.jpg">Details of Tabouret,</a> 18</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-020.jpg">Tabouret as Completed,</a> 20</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-023.jpg">Complete Morris Chair Without Cushion,</a> 23</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-024.jpg">Details of a Morris Chair,</a> 24</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-027.jpg">Light but Strong,</a> 27</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-028.jpg">Details of Stand,</a> 28</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-029.jpg">This Picture is from a Photograph of the Mission Table
+Described in This Article,</a> 29</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-030.jpg">Showing Dimensions of Table,</a> 30</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-032.jpg">Details of Table Construction,</a> 32</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-035a.jpg">Candlestick,</a> 35</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-035b.jpg">Details of Candlestick,</a> 35</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-037.jpg">Mission Chair Complete,</a> 37</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-039.jpg">Details of Mission Chair Construction,</a> 39</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-043.jpg">Completed Stand,</a> 43</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-045.jpg">Details of the Magazine Stand,</a> 45</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-047.jpg">The Completed Swing,</a> 47</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-048.jpg">Details of Seat,</a> 48</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-049.jpg">Showing Construction of Stand,</a> 49</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-050.jpg">Table for Outdoor Use,</a> 50</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-052.jpg">By Swinging the Top Back the Table is Transformed into the
+Elegant Davenport Seen on the Opposite Page,</a> 52</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-053.jpg">The Billiard Table as Converted into a Luxurious
+Davenport&mdash;A Child Can Make the Change in a Moment,</a> 53</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-054.jpg">Details Showing Dimensions of Parts,</a> 54</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-056.jpg">Details of Shoe Rest,</a> 56</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-057.jpg">Details of Tabouret Construction,</a> 57</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-058.jpg">The Desk Complete,</a> 58</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-059.jpg">Details of Tabouret Construction,</a> 59</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-061.jpg">The Desk Complete,</a> 61</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-062.jpg">Rolltop Details,</a> 62</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-064.jpg">Details,</a> 64</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-066.jpg">Detail of Pigeonholes,</a> 66</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-067.jpg">The Roman Chair,</a> 67</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-069.jpg">Details of Parts of Chair,</a> 69</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-071.jpg">A Complete Two-Cushion Settee,</a> 71</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-072.jpg">Details of a Mission Settee,</a> 72</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-073.jpg">Details of the Cushion,</a> 73</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-074.jpg">Convenient Pyrographer&#39;s Table,</a> 74</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-075.jpg">Storage for Apparatus,</a> 75</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-081.jpg">Chairs 1,</a> 81</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-083.jpg">Chairs 2,</a> 83</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-085.jpg">Chairs 3,</a> 85</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-086.jpg">Chairs 4,</a> 86</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-087.jpg">Piano Bench,</a> 87</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-088.jpg">Piano Bench Details,</a> 88</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-090.jpg">Shaving Stand Details,</a> 90</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-091.jpg">Shaving Stand Complete,</a> 91</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-092.jpg">Mirror Frame and Standards Details,</a> 92</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-093.jpg">Waste-Paper Basket to Match Library Table,</a> 93</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-094.jpg">Detail of Waste-Paper Basket,</a> 94</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-097.jpg">Plain-Oak Cellarette Pedestal,</a> 97</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-099.jpg">Detail of Cellarette Pedestal,</a> 99</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-101.jpg">Dresser in Quarter-Sawed Oak,</a> 101</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-102.jpg">Detail of the Dresser,</a> 102</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-104.jpg">Detail of the Mission Sideboard,</a> 104</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-105.jpg">Mission Sideboard in Quarter-Sawed Oak,</a> 105</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-107.jpg">Seat Made of Quarter-Sawed Oak,</a> 107</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-109.jpg">Detail of the Hall or Window Seat,</a> 109</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-110.jpg">Detail of the Plant Stand,</a> 110</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-111.jpg">Complete Plant Stand,</a> 111</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-113.jpg">Medicine Stand in Quarter-Sawed Oak,</a> 113</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-114.jpg">Detail of the Medicine Stand,</a> 114</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-116.jpg">Detail of the Hall Chair,</a> 116</li>
+<li><a href="images/i-117.jpg">Complete Hall Chair in Plain Oak,</a> 117</li>
+</ul>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[5]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOME-MADE_MISSION_CHAIR" id="HOME-MADE_MISSION_CHAIR"></a>HOME-MADE MISSION CHAIR</h2>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 372px;">
+<img src="images/i-004.jpg" width="372" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Suitable for Dining Room Use</span>
+</div>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[6]</a></span></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 539px;">
+<img src="images/i-006.jpg" width="539" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of Chair Construction</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>A mission chair suitable for the dining room can be made from any one of
+the furniture woods to match the other articles of furniture. The
+materials can be secured from the planing mill dressed and sandpapered
+ready to cut the tenons and mortises. The material list can be made up
+from the dimensions given in the detail drawing. The front legs or
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[7]</a></span> posts,
+as well as the back ones, are made from 1-3/4-in. square
+stock, the back ones having a slope of 2 in. from the seat to the top.
+All the slats are made from 7/8-in. material and of such widths as are
+shown in the detail. The three upright slats in the back are 3/4-in.
+material. The detail drawing shows the side and back, the front being
+the same as the back from the seat down. All joints are mortised in the
+posts, as shown. The joints, however, can be made with dowels if
+desired. If making dowel joints they must be clamped very tight when
+glued and put together. The seat can be made from one piece of 7/8-in.
+material, fitted with notches around the posts. This is then upholstered
+with leather without using springs. Leather must be selected as to color
+to suit the kind of wood used in making the chair. The seat can also be
+made with an open center for a cane bottom by making a square of four
+pieces of 7/8-in. material about 4 in. wide. These pieces are fitted
+neatly to the proper size and dowelled firmly together. After the cane
+is put in the opening the cane is covered over and upholstered with
+leather in the same manner as with a solid bottom.</p>
+
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[8]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_LAMP_STAND_AND" id="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_LAMP_STAND_AND"></a>
+HOW TO MAKE A LAMP STAND AND SHADE</h2>
+
+
+<p>A library light stand of pleasing design and easy construction is made
+as follows: Square up a piece of white oak so that it shall have a width
+and thickness of 1-3/4 in. with a length of 13 in. Square up two pieces
+of the same kind of material to the same width and thickness, but with a
+length of 12 in. each. Square up two pieces to a width and length of 3
+in. each with a thickness of 1-1/8 in.</p>
+
+<p>If a planing mill is near, time and patience will be saved by ordering
+one piece 1-3/4 in. square and 40 in. long, two pieces 1-1/8 in. thick
+and 3 in. square, all planed and sandpapered on all surfaces. The long
+piece can then be cut at home to the lengths specified above.</p>
+
+<p>The 13-in. piece is for the upright and should have a 1/2-in. hole bored
+the full length through the center. If the bit is not long enough to
+reach entirely through, bore from each end, then use a red-hot iron to
+finish. This hole is for the electric wire or gas pipe if gas is used.</p>
+
+<p>The two pieces for the base are alike except the groove of one is cut
+from the top and of the other from the under side, as shown. Shape the
+under sides first. This can best be done by placing the two pieces in a
+vise, under sides together, and boring two holes with a 1-in. bit. The
+center of each hole will be 2-1/2 in. from either end and in the crack
+between the pieces. The pieces can then be taken out, lines gauged on
+each side of each, and the wood between
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[10]</a></span>
+the holes removed with turning saw and scraper steel.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 418px;">
+<img src="images/i-009.jpg" width="418" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">The Completed Lamp</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The width of the grooves must be determined by laying one piece upon the
+other; a try-square should be used to square the lines across the
+pieces; however, gauge for depth, gauging both pieces from their top
+surfaces. Chisel out the grooves and round off the corners as shown in
+the sketch, using a 3/4-in. radius.</p>
+
+<p>These parts may be put together and fastened to the upright by means of
+two long screws from the under side, placed to either side of the
+1/2-in. hole. This hole must be continued through the pieces forming the
+base.</p>
+
+<p>The braces are easiest made by taking the two pieces which were planed
+to 1-1/8 in. thick and 3 in. square and drawing a diagonal on each. Find
+the middle of this diagonal by drawing the central portion of the other
+diagonal; at this point place the spur of the bit and bore a 1-in. hole
+in each block.</p>
+
+<p>Saw the two blocks apart, sawing along a diagonal of each. Plane the
+surfaces on the saw cut smooth and sandpaper the curve made by the bit.
+Fasten the braces in place by means of roundhead blued screws.</p>
+
+<p>To make a shade such as is shown in the illustration is rather
+difficult. The shade is made of wood glued up and has art glass fitted
+in rabbets cut on the inner edges. Such shades can be purchased ready to
+attach. The sketch shows one method of attaching. Four small pieces of
+strap iron are bent to the shape shown and fastened to the four sides of
+the upright. Electric globes&mdash;two, three or four may be attached as
+shown.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[11]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 442px;">
+<img src="images/i-011.jpg" width="442" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Construction of Shade</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The kind of wood finish for the stand will depend upon the finish
+on the wooden shade, if shade is purchased. Brown Flemish is obtained
+by first staining the wood with Flemish water stain diluted by the
+addition of two parts water to one part stain. When this is dry,
+sandpaper the "whiskers" which were raised by the water and fill with a
+medium dark filler. Directions will be found on the filler cans. When
+filler has hardened, apply two coats of wax.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[12]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-012.jpg" width="600" height="212" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of Construction of Library Lamp Stand</span>
+</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[13]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The metal shade as shown in the sketch is a "layout" for a copper or
+brass shade of a size suitable for this particular lamp. Such shades are
+frequently made from one piece of sheet metal and designs are pierced in
+them as suggested in the "layout." This piercing is done by driving the
+point of a nail through the metal from the under side before the parts
+are soldered or riveted together. If the parts are to be riveted, enough
+additional metal must be left on the last panel to allow for a lap. No
+lap is needed when joints are soldered.</p>
+
+<p>A better way, and one which will permit the use of heavier metal, is to
+cut each side of the shade separately and fasten them together by
+riveting a piece of metal over each joint. The shape of this piece can
+be made so as to accentuate the rivet heads and thus give a pleasing
+effect.</p>
+
+<p>For art-glass the metal panels are cut out, the glass is inserted from
+the under side and held in place by small clips soldered to the frame of
+the shade.</p>
+
+<p>Pleasing effects are obtained by using one kind of metal, as brass, and
+reinforcing and riveting with another metal, such as copper.</p>
+
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[14]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-014.jpg" width="600" height="370" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of Home-Made Porch Seat</span>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[15]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_PORCH_CHAIR" id="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_PORCH_CHAIR"></a>
+HOW TO MAKE A PORCH CHAIR</h2>
+
+<p>The illustration shows a very comfortable and attractive porch chair
+that can be made with few tools and easily procured material. Most any
+kind of wood will answer, says the American Carpenter and Builder, but
+if open grained wood, such as oak or chestnut, is used, the parts should
+be filled with a paste filler. If the natural color of the wood is not
+desired, the wood may first be stained, the filler being colored
+somewhat darker than the stain.</p>
+
+<p>Procure enough lumber to make all the pieces shown in the detail drawing
+and finish to the dimensions shown, being careful to make the
+corresponding pieces exactly alike in order to preserve the perfect
+symmetry which is necessary in work of this kind. In boring the holes
+care must be taken to keep both edges of the holes sharp and clean. The
+holes should each be bored until the spur shows; the bit should then be
+withdrawn and the rest of the boring be done from the other side. The
+semicircular notches are made by placing the two pieces edge to edge in
+the vise and placing the spur of the bit in the crack. The 1-in. bit is
+used. As it will be difficult to finish the boring of these blocks from
+the second side, the parts remaining may be cut out with the knife after
+the pieces have been separated.</p>
+
+<p>Five 1/2-in. dowel rods are needed. It is possible to get these in one
+long piece if you happen to live near a mill and then all you will have
+to do is to saw off the desired lengths. However, if they cannot be got
+easily you can make your own. Two
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[16]</a></span>
+rods each 18-1/4 in. long; two rods
+each 20-1/4 in. and one rod 22-1/4 in. give the exact lengths. It is
+well to cut each piece a little longer than required so that the ends
+which are imperfectly formed may be cut off. These rods should fit tight
+and may be fastened in addition with a small screw or nail from the
+under or back side.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 550px;">
+<img src="images/i-016.jpg" width="550" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Porch Chair Finished</span>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[17]</a></span></p>
+<p>The hand rests should be nailed to the arms with small nails or brads
+before the arms are bolted. The illustration of the assembled chair
+shows the relative position.</p>
+
+<p>The bolts should be 1/4 in. and of the following lengths: 4 bolts 2-1/4
+in. long; 2 bolts 2 in. long; 2 bolts 3 in. long. Washers should be
+placed between adjacent pieces of wood fastened together with bolts and
+also at both ends of the bolts. This will require 26 washers in all.
+While the size of the chair may be varied, it will be necessary to keep
+the proportions if the parts are to fold properly.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_TABOURET" id="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_TABOURET"></a>HOW TO MAKE A TABOURET</h2>
+
+
+<p>Secure from the planing mill the following pieces
+and have them planed and sandpapered on two surfaces:
+For the top, one piece 7/8 in. thick and 17 in.
+square. For the legs, four pieces 7/8 in. thick, 4-3/4 in.
+wide and 18-1/2 in. long. For the lower stretchers,
+two pieces 7/8 in. thick, 2-3/4 in. wide and 15-3/4 in.
+long. For the top stretchers, two pieces 7/8 in. thick,
+2-1/4 in. wide and 13-1/4 in. long. No stock need be
+ordered for the keys, as they can be made out of the
+waste pieces remaining after the legs are shaped.</p>
+
+<p>Begin work on the four legs first. While both
+sides of each leg slope, it will be necessary to plane
+a joint edge on each leg from which to lay out the
+mortises, grooves and to test the ends. It will be
+necessary to have a bevel square to use in marking
+off the slopes and for testing them. To get the setting
+for the bevel square, make a full sized "lay
+out" or drawing of the necessary lines in their
+proper relation to one another and adjust the bevel
+to those lines.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[18]</a>
+</span></p>
+
+<p>From the joint edge lay out the mortises, grooves and the slopes of
+sides and ends of the legs. Cut the mortises and grooves first,
+then shape up the sides. Saw the sides accurately and quite close
+to the lines, finishing<br /> <span style="margin-left: 0.5em;">
+with</span><br /> the steel cabinet scraper.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 376px;">
+<img src="images/i-018.jpg" width="376" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of Tabouret</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Next make the bottom stretchers. In laying out the cross lap joint, the
+working faces are both to be up when the joint is completed, therefore
+lay off one groove on the face of one piece and on the side opposite the
+face on the other. In gauging for depth, however, be careful to keep the
+gauge block against the working face of each piece.</p>
+
+<p>In laying out the mortises for the keys, the opening
+on the top surface is to be made 1/8 in. longer
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[19]</a></span>
+than on the under surface. The slope of the key will
+therefore be 1/8 in. of slope to each 7/8 in. of length.
+The drawing shows the mortise as 7/8 in. from the
+shoulders of the tenon. This distance is the same as
+the thickness of the leg and to insure the key's pulling
+the shoulder up against the leg firmly, should
+any of the legs happen to be a little less than 7/8 in.,
+it is well to make the mortise slightly nearer the
+shoulder than 7/8 in.</p>
+
+<p>It is a good plan to lay out the mortise in the tenon at the same time
+the shoulders of the tenons are laid out. Otherwise the joint edge being
+cut off in making the tenon there is no convenient way to locate this
+mortise accurately.</p>
+
+<p>Lay off the top stretchers according to the dimensions shown in the
+drawing. Observe the same precautions about the cross lap joint as were
+given for the lower stretchers, except that the joint edges are to be
+placed up in this latter case. Make sure the grooves are laid out in the
+middle before cutting. As a test, place the pieces side by side, examine
+the markings, then turn one of them end for end and again examine.</p>
+
+<p>The grooves into which the legs pass are 1/8 in. deep and must be very
+carefully cut. Their purpose is to give rigidity to the tabouret frame.
+Bore two holes in each stretcher for the screws that are to fasten the
+top in place.</p>
+
+<p>Make the keys, scrape all the parts and sandpaper those that were not so
+treated at the mill. Use glue to fasten the tops of the legs to the top
+stretchers and assemble these parts.</p>
+
+<p>The top is octagonal or eight-sided. To make it,
+square up a piece to 16-1/2 by 16-1/2 in. Measure the
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[20]</a></span>
+diagonal, take one-half of it and measure from each
+corner of the board each way along the edges to
+locate the places at which to cut off the corners.
+Connect these points, saw and plane the remaining
+four sides. There is to be a 5/8-in. bevel on the under
+side of the top. Scrape and sandpaper these edges
+and secure the top to the stretchers with screws.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 488px;">
+<img src="images/i-020.jpg" width="488" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Tabouret as Completed</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Much time can be saved and a better result obtained
+if the wood finishing is done before the parts
+are put together. Especially is this true if stain and
+filler are used.</p>
+
+<p>A very pretty finish and one easily put on even
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[21]</a></span>
+after the parts are put together is obtained as follows:
+Take a barrel and stuff up the cracks or
+paste paper over them so as to make it as near airtight
+as possible. In some out-of-the-way place put
+a dish with about 2 oz. of strong ammonia. Set the
+tabouret over this dish and quickly invert the barrel
+over the tabouret. Allow the fumes to act on the
+wood for at least 15 hours. Remove the barrel and
+allow the fumes to escape. Polish with several coats
+of wax such as is used upon floors. Directions for
+waxing will be found on the cans that contain the
+wax.. This produces the rich nut-brown finish so
+popular in Arts and Crafts furniture and is known
+as fumed oak.</p>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[22]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_MORRIS_CHAIR" id="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_MORRIS_CHAIR"></a>
+HOW TO MAKE A MORRIS CHAIR</h2>
+
+
+<p>The stock necessary to make a morris chair
+of craftsman design as shown in the engraving can
+be purchased mill-planed and sandpapered on four
+sides as given in the following list:</p>
+
+<ul><li>4 posts 1-3/4 by 3 by 26 in.</li>
+<li>2 front and back rails 7/8 by 5-1/2 by 24 in.</li>
+<li>2 side rails 7/8 by 5-1/2 by 28 in.</li>
+<li>2 arm pieces 7/8 by 5-1/2 by 37 in.</li>
+<li>7 slats 3/8 by 2 by 24 in.</li>
+<li>2 cleats 1 by 1 by 22-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>2 back stiles 1 by 2-1/2 by 24-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>2 back rails 1 by 2 by 17 in.</li>
+<li>3 back slats 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 19 in.</li>
+<li>1 back support 3/4 by 3/4 by 24 in.</li>
+<li>2 support rests 1 by 1-1/2 by 8-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>2 dowels 1/2 in. diameter, 6 in. long.</li></ul>
+
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[23]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 515px;">
+<img src="images/i-023.jpg" width="515" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Complete Morris Chair Without Cushion</span> </div>
+
+<p>First make and put together the sides of the chair. While the glue is
+setting on these parts make and assemble the back. The front and back
+rails may next be made and placed and the cleats and bottom slats
+fastened. With the adjustment of the back the chair is ready for the
+finish.</p>
+
+<p>The posts are to be tenoned on the upper ends. These tenons are to
+project 3/16 in. above the arm and should be slightly beveled. The lower
+ends of the posts, likewise, all other projecting ends, should be
+beveled to avoid their splintering. All sharp corners, as on the arms,
+should be sandpapered just enough to take their sharpness off, so as not
+to injure the hand.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[24]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-024.jpg" width="600" height="362" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of a Morris Chair</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>That the chair may be properly inclined, the rear posts are cut 1 in.
+shorter than the forward ones. To get the correct slant on the bottoms
+of these posts, lay a straightedge so that its edge touches the bottom
+of the front post at its front surface, but <span class='pagenum'>
+<a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[25]</a></span> keep it 1 in. above
+the bottom of the rear post. Mark with pencil along the straightedge
+across both posts.</p>
+
+<p>At the rear ends of the arms are the notched
+pieces that allow the back to be adjusted to different
+angles. These pieces may be fastened in place
+either by means of roundhead screws from above or
+flatheads from underneath the arms. The notches
+are to be cut 3/4 in. deep. If more than three adjustments
+are wanted, the arms must be made correspondingly
+longer.</p>
+
+<p>The dimensions for the tenons on all the larger pieces will be found on
+the drawing. For the back, the tenons of the cross pieces, the rails,
+should be 3/8 by 1-1/4-in. For the slats, the easiest way is to not
+tenon them but to "let in" the whole end, making the mortises in the
+rails 3/8 by 1-1/2 in. This will necessitate cutting the sides of the
+mortises very accurately, but this extra care will be more than
+compensated by not having to bother with the cutting of tenons on each
+end of the three back slats.</p>
+
+<p>To finish the chair, put on a coat of water stain, first removing all
+surplus glue and thoroughly scraping and sandpapering all the parts that
+were not so treated at the mill. The color of the stain will depend upon
+the finish desired, whether golden, mission, etc. Water stains cause the
+grain of the wood to roughen, so it will be necessary to resandpaper the
+surfaces after the stain has dried, using fine paper. Next apply a coat
+of filler colored to match the stain. Directions for its application
+will be found upon the cans in which the filler comes. After the filler
+has hardened put on a very thin coat of shellac.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[26]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>What step is taken next will depend upon what kind of a surface is
+desired. Several coats of polishing wax may be put on. This is easily
+done&mdash;directions will be found on the cans&mdash;and makes the most
+satisfactory finish for mission and craftsman furniture. It is the
+easiest to apply. Several coats of shellac or of varnish might be put on
+instead of wax. Each coat of the shellac should be rubbed when
+thoroughly dried with curled hair or fine steel wool or fine oiled
+sandpaper. Rub the first coats of varnish with hair-cloth or curled hair
+and the last coats with pulverized pumice stone and crude oil or raw
+linseed oil.</p>
+
+<p>Cushions for the chair can be made at home. They may be made of art
+leather such as Spanish roan skin and the top and bottom parts fastened
+together by lacing leather thongs through holes previously punched along
+the edges of the parts. A very pretty effect is obtained by using thongs
+of a different but harmonious color. The manner of lacing may be any one
+of the various laces such as are used in lacing belts or as shoestrings.
+These cushions may be filled with hair or cotton felt. Denim or burlap
+may also be used as a covering and are much less expensive than the
+leather. Lace one side and the two ends, then place filling and finish
+lacing.</p>
+
+<p>Art leather cushions retail at from $16 to $20 a pair and the denim and
+burlap at $6 to $9.</p>
+
+<p>The bottom cushion should be made the full size of the chair. The front
+and back rails extend a little above the slats and thus hold it in
+place. The back cushion will settle down a little and therefore may be
+made nearly the full length from the slats to the top of the back.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[27]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOME-MADE_MISSION_BOOK_RACK" id="HOME-MADE_MISSION_BOOK_RACK"></a>
+HOME-MADE MISSION BOOK RACK</h2>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 413px;">
+<img src="images/i-027.jpg" width="413" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Light but Strong</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>When making the book rack as shown in the accompanying photograph use
+quarter-sawed oak if possible, as this wood is the most suitable for
+finishing in the different mission stains. This piece of furniture is
+very attractive and simple to construct.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[28]</a></span>
+The upper shelf can be used for vases or a plant of some kind, while the
+lower shelves afford ample room for books and magazines.</p>
+
+<p>The slats and legs are fastened to the shelves with 2-in. round-headed
+brass screws. These can be purchased from any hardware store. One screw
+is used at each joint of a slat and shelf which calls for 32 screws in
+all. Holes should be bored into the slats and legs in which to insert
+the screws. This will keep the wood from splitting. The dimensions are
+given in the diagram sketch, although these may be changed to suit the
+requirement of the builder. If no glue is used on the joints when
+setting up, the rack can easily be taken apart and put in a small bundle
+for moving.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 486px;">
+<img src="images/i-028.jpg" width="486" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of Stand</span>
+</div>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[29]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_MISSION_LIBRARY" id="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_MISSION_LIBRARY">
+</a>HOW TO MAKE A MISSION LIBRARY TABLE</h2>
+
+
+<p>The mission library table, the drawings for which are here given, has
+been found well proportioned and of pleasing appearance. It can be made
+of any of the several furniture woods in common use, such as selected,
+quarter-sawed white oak which will be found exceptionally pleasing in
+the effect produced.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-029.jpg" width="600" height="441" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">This Picture is from a Photograph of the Mission Table
+Described in This Article</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>If a planing mill is at hand the stock can be ordered in such a way as
+to avoid the hard work of planing and sandpapering. Of course if
+mill-planed stock cannot be had, the following dimensions must be
+enlarged slightly to allow for "squaring up the rough."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[30]</a></span></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-030.jpg" width="600" height="246" alt=""/>
+<br /><span class="caption">Showing Dimensions of Table</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>For the top, order 1 piece 1-1/8 in. thick, 34 in. wide and 46 in. long.
+Have it S-4-S (surface on four sides) and "squared" to length. Also
+specify that it be sandpapered on the top surface, the edges and ends.</p>
+
+<p>For the shelf, order 1 piece 7/8 in. thick, 22 in. wide and 42 in. long,
+with the four sides surfaced, squared and sandpapered the same as for
+the top.</p>
+
+<p>For the side rails, order 2 pieces 7/8 in. thick, 6 in. wide and 37 in.
+long, S-4-S and sanded on one side. For the end rails, 2 pieces 7/8 in.
+thick, 6 in. wide and 25 in. long. Other specifications as for the side
+rails.</p>
+
+<p>For the stretchers, into which the shelf tenons enter, 2 pieces 1-1/8
+in. thick, 3-3/4 in. wide and 25 in. long, surfaced and sanded on four
+sides. For the slats, 10 pieces 5/8 in. thick, 1-1/2 in. wide and 17 in.
+long, surfaced and sanded on four sides. For the keys, 4 pieces 3/4 in.
+thick, 1-1/4 in. wide and 2-7/8 in. long, S-4-S. This width is a little
+wide; it will allow the key to be shaped as desired.</p>
+
+<p>The drawings obviate any necessity for going into detail in the
+description. Fig. 1 gives an assembly drawing showing the relation of
+the parts. Fig. 2 gives the detail of an end. The tenons for the side
+rails are laid off and the mortises placed in the post as are those on
+the end. Care must be taken, however, not to cut any mortises on the
+post below, as was done in cutting the stretcher mortises on the ends of
+the table. A good plan is to set the posts upright in the positions they
+are to occupy relative to one another and mark with pencil the
+approximate positions of the mortises. The legs can then
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[32]</a></span>
+be laid flat and the mortises accurately marked out with a fair degree of
+assurance that they will not be cut where they are not wanted and that the
+legs shall "pair" properly when effort is made to assemble the parts of the
+table.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-032.jpg" width="600" height="385" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of Table Construction</span></div>
+
+<p>The table ends should be glued up first and the glue allowed to harden,
+after which the tenons of the shelf may be inserted and the side rails
+placed.</p>
+
+<p>There is a reason for the shape, size and location of each tenon or
+mortise. For illustration, the shape of the tenon on the top rails
+permits the surface of the rail to extend almost flush with the surface
+of the post at the same time permitting the mortise in the post to be
+kept away from that surface. Again, the shape of the ends of the slats
+is such that, though they may vary slightly in length, the fitting of
+the joints will not be affected. Care must be taken in cutting the
+mortises to keep their sides clean and sharp and to size.</p>
+
+<p>In making the mortises for the keyed tenons, the length of mortise must
+be slightly in excess of the width of the tenon&mdash;about 1/8 in. of
+play to each side of each tenon. With a shelf of the width specified for
+this table, if such allowance is not made so that the tenons may move
+sideways, the shrinkage would split the shelf.</p>
+
+<p>In cutting across the ends of the shelf, between the tenons, leave a
+hole in the waste so that the turning saw or compass saw can be
+inserted. Saw within one-sixteenth of the line, after which this margin
+may be removed with chisel and mallet.</p>
+
+<p>In Fig. 3 is shown two views of the keyed tenon and the key. The mortise
+for the key is to be placed in the middle of the tenon. It will be noted
+that <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[34]</a></span>
+this mortise is laid out 1-1/16 in. from the shoulder of the
+tenon while the stretcher is 1-1/8 in. thick. This is to insure the
+key's pulling the shelf tightly against the side of the stretcher.</p>
+
+<p>Keys may be made in a variety of shapes. The one shown is simple and
+structurally good. Whatever shape is used, the important thing to keep
+in mind is that the size of the key and the slant of its forward surface
+where it passes through the tenon must be kept the same as the mortise
+made for it in the tenon.</p>
+
+<p>The top is to be fastened to the rails by means either of wooden
+buttons, Fig. 4, or small angle irons.</p>
+
+<p>There are a bewildering number of mission finishes upon the market. A
+very satisfactory one is obtained by applying a coat of brown Flemish
+water stain, diluted by the addition of water in the proportion of two
+parts water to 1 part stain. When this has dried, sand with No. 00
+paper, being careful not to "cut through." Next, apply a coat of dark
+brown filler; the directions for doing this will be found upon the can
+in which the filler is bought. One coat usually suffices. However, if an
+especially smooth surface is desired, a second coat may be applied in a
+similar manner.</p>
+
+<p>After the filler has hardened, a very thin coat of shellac is to be put
+on. When this has dried, it should be sanded lightly and then one or two
+coats of wax should be properly applied and polished. Directions for
+waxing are upon the cans in which the wax is bought. A beautiful dull
+gloss so much sought by finishers of modern furniture will be the result
+of carefully following these directions.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[35]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOME-MADE_MISSION_CANDLESTICK" id="HOME-MADE_MISSION_CANDLESTICK"></a>
+HOME-MADE MISSION CANDLESTICK</h2>
+
+
+<p>There are many kinds of mission candlesticks, but few of them carry out
+the mission design throughout. Herewith is illustrated a candlestick
+which may be made from the various woods that will have the style and
+lines of mission craft work. The base is made from 1-in. material, 4-1/2
+in. square. Two holes are bored and countersunk for screws to hold the
+post and handle. The post is 2-1/4 in. high, bored in one end to fit the
+size of a candle. The post is covered with a 3/8-in. thick cap, 2 in.
+square. This, also, is bored to fit the candle. The handle is 3/8 in.
+thick and 3 in. long with a 3/8-in. square mortise and is notched to fit
+the base. The wood may be selected to match any other piece of furniture
+and finished in any of the mission stains.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-035a.jpg" width="600" height="391" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Candlestick</span>
+</div>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-035b.jpg" width="600" height="342" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of Candlestick</span>
+</div>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[36]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="ANOTHER_STYLE_OF_MISSION_CHAIR" id="ANOTHER_STYLE_OF_MISSION_CHAIR"></a>
+ANOTHER STYLE OF MISSION CHAIR</h2>
+
+
+<p>The material necessary to make a mission chair as shown in the
+accompanying illustration may be secured from a planing mill with all
+four surfaces squared and sandpapered. The mill can do this work quickly
+and the expense will be nothing compared with the time it takes to do
+the work by hand.</p>
+
+<p>The following is the stock list:</p>
+
+
+<ul><li>4 legs, 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 by 32-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>2 bottom end rails 7/8 by 5-3/4 by 23-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>2 bottom side rails 7/8 by 5-3/4 by 28-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>2 top end rails 7/8 by 4-1/2 by 23-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>1 top back rail 7/8 by 4-1/2 by 28-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>2 cleats 7/8 by 2-1/2 by 26-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>7 slats 1/2 by 2 by 24 in.</li></ul>
+
+
+
+<p>This design was purposely made simple. If it is considered too severe
+and the worker has had some experience in woodwork, it can easily be
+modified by adding vertical slats in back and sides. These should be
+made of 1/2-in. stock and their ends should be "let into" the rails by
+means of mortises.</p>
+
+<p>Either plain red oak or quarter-sawed white oak will do. Begin by
+squaring up one end of each leg, marking and cutting them to length and
+planing up the second ends so that they shall be square. Both the top
+and bottom of each leg should be beveled or rounded off about 1/4 in. so
+that they may not splinter or cause injury to the hand.</p>
+
+<p>When all of the legs have been made of the same length, set them on end
+in the positions they are to have relative to one another and mark with
+pencil the approximate locations of the mortises. Next, place them on
+the bench, side by side, even the ends
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[37]</a></span>
+and square sharp lines across to indicate the ends of the mortises. The
+drawing shows the dimensions to use. A sharp pencil should be used for
+this marking and the lines should be carried entirely across the two
+faces of each piece.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-037.jpg" width="600" height="565" alt=""/>
+<br /><span class="caption">Mission Chair Complete</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Set the gauge for the side of the mortise nearest the face edge. With
+this setting, mark all the mortises, then set for the second side of the
+mortise and complete the gauging.</p>
+
+<p>There are two ways of cutting small mortises in common use. One is by
+using a chisel of a width just equal to that of the mortise. The other
+is by using a smaller chisel after the mortise has first been bored with
+the brace and bit. In the first method the cutting is begun at the
+middle of the mortise where a V-shaped opening is made the full depth of
+the mortise that is to be. Continuing from the middle, vertical cuts are
+taken first toward one end and then toward the other. The chips are
+pried out as the cutting proceeds. In making the last cut this prying
+must be omitted, otherwise the edge of the mortise would be ruined. It
+will be necessary to stand so as to look along the opening in order to
+get the sides plumb.</p>
+
+<p>This method of cutting, when once the "knack" has been attained, will be
+found much easier, quicker and more accurate for small openings, such as
+these, than the usual method. The second method, which is the usual one,
+needs no description.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[39]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-039.jpg" width="600" height="499" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of Mission Chair
+Construction</span></div>
+
+<p>The rails should next have the tenons cut on their ends. It may not be
+out of place to remind the amateur that the lengths of the various like
+pieces can best be laid off by placing them on the bench, measuring off
+the proper distances on one of them and then with try-square marking
+across the edges of all of them at once. This not only saves time in
+that but one set of measurements need be made, but it insures all the
+pieces being similarly laid off. In measuring off for the shoulders of
+the tenons, begin at the middle of the length of the rail and measure
+half of the distance each way. By doing so, if there are any slight
+differences in the lengths of the pieces this difference will be divided
+between the two tenons and no harm will be done.</p>
+
+<p>In gauging the tenons take the precaution to mark a working face and
+joint edge, even if all the surfaces were finish-planed at the mill. It
+is very important that all tenon gauging be done from these faces. The
+same is true of the legs or posts, and the slats if there are to be any.</p>
+
+<p>To avoid confusion it is well to number each tenon by means of the
+chisel with a Roman numeral and its corresponding mortise with the same.
+This will prevent the fitting of one tenon into more than one mortise.</p>
+
+<p>Put the parts together with warm glue if it can be had, otherwise use
+the prepared cold glue. In cold weather the wood ought to be warmed
+before the glue is applied. Put the ends of the chair together first.
+When the glue has set on these put the other rails in place.</p>
+
+<p>When clamping up the second set of rails make sure the frame of the
+chair is square. The best way to test for squareness is to measure the
+diagonals with a stick. Spring the frame until they measure alike, using
+a brace to hold the frame in position until the glue can harden.</p>
+
+<p>Before staining, scrape off any surplus glue, for
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[41]</a></span>
+stain will not adhere to glue and a white spot will be the result of
+failing to remove it. Fasten cleats to the front and back rails with
+screws. To these cleats fasten the slats as shown in the drawing. A
+cushion of Spanish leather, such as is shown in the photograph, can be
+bought at the furniture store or the upholsterer's. It can be made by
+the amateur quite easily, however. The two parts are fastened together
+with leather thongs and the filling is of hair or elastic felt. A
+cushion for the back might well be provided.</p>
+
+<p>To finish the wood to match a brown leather proceed as follows: With a
+cloth or brush, stain the wood with brown Flemish water stain diluted by
+the addition of four parts of water. When this has dried, sandpaper
+smooth, using No. 00 paper held on the tips of the fingers. Apply a dark
+brown filler. When this has flatted, i. e., when the gloss has
+disappeared, which will be in the course of ten or fifteen minutes, wipe
+off clean with excelsior and then with waste or a cloth. Allow this to
+dry over night, then apply two or three coats of wax. Polish each coat
+with a flannel cloth by briskly rubbing it.</p>
+
+<p>A settle can be made after this design by using longer front and back
+rails. Rails 42 in. between shoulders will make a good length for a
+settle.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[42]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_AND_FINISH_A_MAGAZINE" id="HOW_TO_MAKE_AND_FINISH_A_MAGAZINE"></a>
+HOW TO MAKE AND FINISH A MAGAZINE STAND</h2>
+
+
+<p>For the magazine stand shown herewith there
+will be needed the following pieces:</p>
+
+
+<ul><li>1 top, 7/8 in. by 15-1/2 in. by 16-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>1 shelf, 7/8 in. by 11-1/2 in. by 12-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>1 shelf, 7/8 in. by 12-1/2 in. by 14-3/4 in.</li>
+<li>1 shelf, 7/8 in. by 13-1/2 in. by 16-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>2 sides, 7/8 in. by 14-1/2 in. by 33-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>1 brace, 7/8 in. by 3-1/4 in. by 17 in.</li>
+<li>1 brace, 7/8 in. by 2-1/2 in. by 11-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>6 braces, 7/8 in. by 2 in. by 2 in.</li></ul>
+
+
+
+<p>Order these pieces mill-planed on two surfaces
+to the thickness specified above and also sandpapered.
+Quarter-sawed white oak makes the best
+appearance of all the woods that are comparatively
+easy to obtain. Plain sawed red or white oak will
+look well but are more liable to warp than the
+quarter-sawed. This is quite an element in pieces as
+wide as these.</p>
+
+<p>Begin work on the sides first. Plane a joint edge
+on each and from this work the two ends. The ends
+will be square to the joint edge but beveled to the
+working face. A bevel square will be needed for
+testing these beveled ends.</p>
+
+<p>To set the bevel make a drawing, full size or nearly
+so, of the front view and place the bevel on the drawing,
+adjusting its sides to the angle wanted. Work
+from a center line in laying off the drawing.</p>
+
+<p>Having planed the ends, lay off the sides. This is
+done by measuring from the joint edge along the
+bottom 14 in., from the joint edge along the top
+1-1/2 in. and from this 11 in. Connect the points by
+means of a pencil and straightedge.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[43]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 385px;">
+<img src="images/i-043.jpg" width="385" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Completed Stand</span>
+</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[44]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Before cutting off the joint edges of the pieces
+measure off and square lines across to indicate the
+locations of the shelves. Put both pieces together
+and mark across both joint edges at once to insure
+getting both laid off alike.</p>
+
+<p>The design at the bottom can be varied to suit
+the fancy of the worker. For such a design as is
+shown, draw on paper, full size, half of it; fold on
+the center line and with scissors cut both sides of
+the outline by cutting along the line just drawn.
+Trace around this pattern on the wood, and saw out
+with compass or turning saw.</p>
+
+<p>The shelves may now be made. The bevel of the
+ends of the shelves will be the same as for the ends
+of the side pieces. The lengths may be obtained by
+measuring the drawing. Remember that length is
+always measured along the grain and that the end
+grain of the shelves must extend from side to side
+in this stand. The widths may be obtained by measuring
+the width of the sides at the points marked
+out on them for the location of the shelf ends. It is
+best not to have the shelves the full width of the
+sides, since the edges of the shelves are to be faced
+with leather. Make each shelf 1/2 in. less than the
+width of the side, at the place that the shelf is to
+be fastened.</p>
+
+<p>The top will be squared up in the usual manner, 15 in. wide by 16 in.
+long.</p>
+
+<p>These parts may now be put together. They may be fastened in any one of
+a variety of ways. Round-head blued screws may be placed at regular
+intervals through the sides. Finishing nails may be used and the heads
+set and covered with putty stained to match the wood. Finish nails may
+be <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[45]</a></span>
+placed at regular intervals and fancy headed nails used to cover the
+heads.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 593px;">
+<img src="images/i-045.jpg" width="593" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of the Magazine Stand</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The braces should be formed and fitted but not
+fastened until the finish has been applied. Thoroughly
+scrape and sandpaper all parts not already
+so treated. Probably no other finish appeals to so
+many people as golden oak. There is no fixed standard
+of color for golden oak. Different manufacturers
+have set standards in their part of the country, but
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[46]</a></span>
+the prevailing idea of golden oak is usually that of a
+rich reddish brown.</p>
+
+<p>Proceed as follows: Egg shell gloss: 1.&mdash;One coat of golden oak
+water stain, diluted with water if a light golden is desired.
+2.&mdash;Allow time to dry, then sandpaper lightly with fine sandpaper.
+This is to smooth the grain and to bring up the high lights by removing
+the stain from the wood. Use No. 00 sandpaper and hold it on the finger
+tips. 3.&mdash;Apply a second coat of the stain diluted about one-half
+with water. This will throw the grain into still higher relief and thus
+produce a still greater contrast. Apply this coat of stain very
+sparingly, using a rag. Should this stain raise the grain, again rub
+lightly with fine worn sandpaper, just enough to smooth. 4.&mdash;When
+this has dried, put on a light coat of thin shellac. Shellac precedes
+filling that it may prevent the high lights&mdash;the solid parts of the
+wood&mdash;from being discolored by the stain in the filler, and thus
+causing a muddy effect. The shellac being thin does not interfere with
+the filler's entering the pores of the open grain. 5.&mdash;Sand lightly
+with fine sandpaper. 6.&mdash;Fill with paste filler colored to match
+the stain. 7.&mdash;Cover this with a coat of orange shellac. This coat
+of shellac might be omitted, but another coat of varnish must be added.
+8.&mdash;Sandpaper lightly. 9.&mdash;Apply two or three coats of
+varnish. 10.&mdash;Rub the first coats with hair cloth or curled hair
+and then with pulverized pumice stone, crude oil or linseed oil. Affix
+the braces just after filling, using brads and puttying the holes with
+putty colored to match the filler. The shelves may be faced with thin
+leather harmonizing with the oak, ornamental headed tacks being used to
+fasten it in place.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[47]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOME-MADE_LAWN_SWING" id="HOME-MADE_LAWN_SWING"></a>HOME-MADE LAWN SWING</h2>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-047.jpg" width="600" height="373" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">The Completed Swing</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The coming of spring and summer calls forth
+various kinds of porch and lawn furniture. A porch
+or lawn swing to accommodate two or more persons
+is a thing desired by most people. The lawn swing
+as shown in the picture is portable and does not need
+stakes to hold it to the ground. While this swing
+is substantial and rigid it can be moved from place
+to place on the lawn, or the chains can be fastened
+with heavy hooks to the ceiling of a porch instead
+of using the stand. Either ropes or chains may be
+used to hang the swing and should be of such length
+that the seat will be about 20 in. from the ground or
+floor.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[48]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The drawing giving the dimensions for constructing
+the seat shows how the parts are put together.
+The front and back apron pieces are mortised to
+receive a 1-in. square tenon cut on the crosspieces
+that support the slats. Each end of the apron pieces
+extends 4 in., and a hole is bored at A into which the
+hanging ropes or chains are fastened. If ropes are
+used, bore the holes to fit the rope and when the
+end of each rope is put through a hole it is tied in
+a knot to keep from slipping out. Chains can be
+fastened with eye bolts. Small carriage or stove
+bolts are used to hold the slats on the framework
+and cross pieces. The arm rests are fastened with
+wood screws.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-048.jpg" width="600" height="442" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of Seat</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The drawing for the stand gives all the dimensions for its construction.
+Split the upright pieces or legs with a saw cut to the length as shown.
+A bolt should be put through each piece edgewise at the end of the saw
+cut, to keep the wood from splitting any farther when the ends are
+spread to receive the bolts through the cross pieces at the top. The
+upper ends of the ropes or chains are fastened close to and under the
+bolt holding the inside forks of the uprights. This bolt can be long
+enough<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[49]</a></span>
+to fasten a clevis that will hang underneath for this purpose. The whole
+swing can be painted with a forest green color which is very suitable for
+summer outdoor furniture.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-049.jpg" width="600" height="552" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Showing Construction of Stand</span>
+</div>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[50]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_PORTABLE_TABLE" id="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_PORTABLE_TABLE"></a>
+HOW TO MAKE A PORTABLE TABLE</h2>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-050.jpg" width="600" height="382" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Table for Outdoor Use</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>A table for outdoor use that can be taken apart, stored or changed from
+place to place may be made at small expense. Fasten cleats with screws,
+as shown in Fig. 1, to the bottom of a board of suitable size. The legs
+are built with a cross piece, A, Fig. 4, at the top which fits into slot
+formed by the cleats, CC, and a crosspiece, B, that has two cleats, D,
+making a place to receive the bottom end of the brace, E, Fig. 2. The
+upper ends of the braces, EE, fit in between two pieces, F, fastened in
+the middle of the board. The three pins fitting loosely in DD and F,
+Fig. 2, are all that holds table together. The end view is shown in Fig.
+3.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[51]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_COMBINATION_BILLIARD"
+id="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_COMBINATION_BILLIARD"></a>HOW TO MAKE A COMBINATION BILLIARD
+TABLE AND DAVENPORT</h2>
+
+
+<p>A small size billiard table which can be converted quickly into a
+davenport is made as follows: Secure clear, selected plain sawed white
+oak in sizes as indicated by the drawing. Have these planed at the mill
+to the widths and thicknesses specified.</p>
+
+<p>The lower part should be made first. Cut the four posts to length,
+chamfering the ends somewhat so that they will not splinter when in use.
+Lay out and cut the mortises which are to receive the rails. The lower
+rails are to be 1-1/8 in. thick and the mortises are to be laid out in
+the legs so as to bring their outer surfaces almost flush with those of
+the posts. The upper rails are 2-1/4 in. wide. The slats are 3/4 in.
+thick. Tenons should be thoroughly pinned to the sides of the mortises
+as shown in the illustration. The braces are 1-3/4 in. thick and are
+fastened to place with roundhead screws and glue.</p>
+
+<p>The seat may be made by putting in a solid bottom that shall rest upon
+cleats fastened to the inner surfaces of the rails. The top of this
+bottom should rest about 3/4 in. below the top edge of the rails. A well
+filled leather cushion completes this part.</p>
+
+<p>A more satisfactory result is obtained by putting in springs and
+upholstering the seat. Upon this the leather cushion can be placed.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[52]</a></span></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-052.jpg" width="600" height="307" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">By Swinging the Top Back the Table is Transformed
+into the Elegant Davenport Seen on the Opposite Page</span></div>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-053.jpg" width="600" height="456" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">The Billiard Table as Converted into a Luxurious
+Davenport&mdash;A Child Can Make the Change in a Moment</span></div>
+
+<p>The top or table is built upon and about a heavy
+frame of well seasoned 1-3/4-in. by 5-3/4-in. white pine.
+The parts to this frame are thoroughly mortised and
+tenoned together. Middle stretchers, lengthwise and
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[53]</a></span>
+crosswise, give added strength and rigidity. Upon
+this frame the slate bed is leveled by planing the
+frame wherever necessary. Slats are fastened to
+the bed by screws, the heads of which are countersunk
+so that they may be covered over even with
+plaster of paris.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[54]</a></span></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-054.jpg" width="600" height="287" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details Showing
+Dimensions of Parts</span></div>
+
+<p>The top and side facings are built together, the angle being reinforced
+with block and glue, as shown in detail. These facings, to which the
+cushions are attached, are afterward made fast to the frame by
+ornamental headed screws. The detail and photograph show the manner of
+applying the under facing.</p>
+
+<p>Before attaching the top and side facings, the bed cloth should be
+placed over the slate and fastened. The nap of the cloth should run from
+the head toward the opposite end of the table. Draw the cloth as tight
+as possible, taking care that there shall be no wrinkles.</p>
+
+<p>The billiard cushions can be bought ready to cover. The bumpers which
+keep the top from striking the front posts can be obtained by making
+proper selection from oak door bumpers carried in stock by hardware
+dealers. The brass swing bars, most likely, can be obtained at the same
+place.</p>
+
+<p>The upholstering on the under side of the top&mdash;the back of the
+davenport&mdash;is to be built upon a stout frame made of some suitable
+common wood, and the whole set in the recess formed as shown in the
+detail drawing&mdash;the whole being fastened from the back before the
+slate bed is put in position.</p>
+
+<p>Effort should be made to select leather of a color that will harmonize
+with the wood finish which is to be applied.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[56]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="EASILY_MADE_BOOK_SHELVES" id="EASILY_MADE_BOOK_SHELVES"></a>
+EASILY MADE BOOK SHELVES</h2>
+
+
+<p>Very cheap but useful and attractive book shelves are shown in the
+accompanying drawing. The vertical strips, A, may be 3/4 in. by 2 in.
+and are screwed to four shelves, B, each cut to the shape of a quarter
+circle. The screws are all countersunk and as the heads all come on the
+side next to the wall, they do not show. The design might be varied
+somewhat to suit the fancy of the builder, although the appearance of
+the shelves constructed as shown is very pleasing, especially so if the
+workmanship is good and the wood carefully stained and varnished. The
+total cost of construction was less than 75 cents.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 324px;">
+<img src="images/i-056.jpg" width="324" height="595" alt="TABOURET" title="" />
+</div>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[57]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="A_BLACKING_CASE_TABOURET" id="A_BLACKING_CASE_TABOURET"></a>
+A BLACKING CASE TABOURET</h2>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 503px;">
+<img src="images/i-057.jpg" width="503" height="600" alt="" title="" />
+</div>
+
+<p>A substantial piece of mission furniture which may
+be used as a tabouret or plant stand as well as a
+blacking case, in which there is a receptacle for
+brushes, blacking and a shoe rest, is shown in the
+illustration. The stock can be secured mill-planed,
+sandpapered and in lengths almost ready to be assembled.
+The stock list consists of the following
+pieces:</p>
+
+
+<ul><li>4 posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 17 in.</li>
+<li>4 side rails, 1 by 6-1/2 by 9-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>2 top pieces, 1 by 8-1/4 by 16-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>1 bottom, 1/4 by 9-1/2 by 9-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>1 cleat, 1 by 1 by 18 in.</li></ul>
+
+
+
+<p>The posts and cleat are surfaced on four sides, while the other pieces
+are surfaced on only two<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58"
+id="Page_58">[58]</a></span> sides. The allowance of 1/2 in. on the
+side rails, top and bottom, is for fitting the joints. Be sure the
+surfaces of the pieces for the posts are square and the ends sawed
+square off, making the posts exactly the same length when they come from
+the mill.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 434px;">
+<img src="images/i-058.jpg" width="434" height="589" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of Shoe Rest</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Square up the four side rails to 6 by 9 in. Cut one end of each post
+tapering with a chisel; face and sandpaper the posts and side rails
+before making the joints. The side rails are attached to the posts with
+three dowels to each joint. The place for each dowel is located by
+making a line exactly in the middle lengthwise on each end of each side
+rail. Three lines are made to intersect this middle line, as shown in
+the detail. Drive a 1/2-in. brad in each intersection allowing a small
+portion of each brad to project, and cut off
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[59]</a></span>
+the heads. Gauge a line in the middle of each post at the top where the
+joints are to be made and press the end of a side rail containing the
+brads against the post. This will mark the places to bore holes for the
+dowels. Pull out the brads and bore holes for the dowel pins.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 288px;">
+<img src="images/i-059.jpg" width="288" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of Tabouret Construction</span></div>
+
+<p>When gluing up the side rails and posts, first put on a coat of glue on
+the ends of the side rails and let it dry. This will fill up the pores
+in the end grain of the wood which will
+make a strong<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[60]</a></span>
+joint when finally glued together. The dowel pins are made 3/8 in.
+square with a slight taper at the ends. These can be easily forced into
+the holes, when the ends of the side rails are coated with glue and
+ready to be put together, by clamps pressing on the outside of the
+posts.</p>
+
+<p>The bottom is held in position with narrow strips tacked on the lower
+edge of the side rails. Square up the top pieces to 8 by 16 in. and
+fasten one piece to the top with cleats and screws as shown in the
+drawing. The other piece is hinged to the first one with two 2-in.
+hinges.</p>
+
+<p>The shoe rest can be made from a block of wood and covered with sheet
+tin, copper or brass, or a cast-iron rest can be purchased. The rest is
+fastened to the under side of the hinged top. Stain the wood any dark
+color and apply a very thin coat of shellac. Put on wax and you will
+have a finish that can be renewed at any time by wiping with a little
+turpentine and rewaxing.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[61]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_ROLL_TOP_DESK" id="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_ROLL_TOP_DESK"></a>
+HOW TO MAKE A ROLL TOP DESK</h2>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-061.jpg" width="600" height="487" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">The Desk Complete</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The materials for this roll top desk can be purchased
+from a mill dressed and sandpapered so
+the hardest part of the work will be finished. The
+wood must be selected to suit the builder and to
+match other articles of furniture. The following list
+of materials will be required:</p>
+
+
+<ul><li>68 lineal ft. of 1 by 3 in. hardwood.</li>
+<li>65 lineal ft. of 1 by 2 in. hardwood.</li>
+<li>3 lineal ft. of 1/4 by 24 in. hardwood.</li>
+<li>45 lineal ft. of 1/4 by 10-1/2 in. hardwood.</li>
+<li>36 lineal ft. of 1 by 12 in. hardwood.</li>
+<li>35 lineal ft. of 3/8 by 9 in. soft wood.</li>
+<li>100 sq. ft. of 1/2 by 12 in. soft wood.</li>
+<li>1 piece 34 in. wide and 54 in. long hardwood.</li>
+<li>30 pieces 1 by 1 in. 48 in. long.</li></ul>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[62]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-062.jpg" width="600" height="344" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Rolltop Details</span>
+</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[63]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The upper and lower back panels are constructed
+very similar, the only difference being in the height.
+The inside edge of the 3-in. pieces is plowed with
+a 1/4-in. plow 3/8 in. deep exactly in the center and
+also both edges of each 2-in. piece. The 16-in. pieces
+in the upper back panel and the 24-in. pieces in the
+lower back panel must be cut 1/2 in. longer and a
+1/4-in. tongue made on each end to fit into the plowed
+groove and form a mortise joint.</p>
+
+<p>The upper back panel is filled in with four boards 9-1/2 in. wide and
+16-1/2 in. long, while the four boards in the lower back panel are 9-1/2
+in. wide and 24-1/2 in. long cut from the 1/4-in. hard wood. When the
+grooves are cut properly, the joints made perfect and the boards fitted
+to the right size, these two panels can be assembled and pressed
+together in cabinet clamps. This will make the outside dimensions as
+given in the drawing.</p>
+
+<p>The end panels are made very similar to the lower back panel, the only
+difference being in the width of the filling boards, which are 10-1/2
+in. for the outside end panels and 10 in. for the inside panels. One end
+panel and one inside panel make the sides of one pedestal. As the end
+panels are 1 in. wider than the inside panels they overlap the back
+panel and cover up the rough ends of the boards. A 1-in. piece 2 in.
+wide is fastened at the top and bottom of each end and inside panels as
+shown by the dotted lines. The lower back panel is fastened on by
+turning screws through the back and into the ends of these pieces. The
+bottom pieces have 2-in. notches cut out, as shown, into which to fit
+two crosspieces across the bottom of the pedestal for holding the
+casters. The top end panels are made as shown in
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[64]</a></span> the drawing, the
+inside edge of the pieces being plowed out, making a groove the same
+size as in the other pieces of the panels. The panel board is cut to the
+proper shape from the 1/4-by 24-in. material. The length given in the
+material list will be sufficient if the pointed ends are allowed to pass
+each other when laying out the design.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 457px;">
+<img src="images/i-064.jpg" width="457" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Instead of cutting a groove for the roll top curtain, one is made by
+fastening a 1/2-by 3/4-in. strip 7/8 in. down from the edge and on the
+inside of the panel. A thin 1/4-by 1-3/4-in. strip is bent to form the
+shape of the edge and fastened with round-headed brass screws. A 1-in.
+piece is fastened at the back and a groove cut into it as shown by the
+dotted line into which to slide a 1/4-in. back board. The top is a
+12-in. board 54 in. long.</p>
+
+<p>As both pedestals are made alike, the detail of
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[65]</a></span>
+only one is shown. The partitions upon which the drawers slide are made
+up from 1-in. square material with a 2-in. end fitted as shown.
+Dimensions are given for the divisions of each drawer, but these can be
+changed to suit the builder. The detail of one drawer is shown, giving
+the length and width, the height being that of the top drawer. The roll
+top curtain is made up from 1-in. pieces 3/4 in. thick and 48 in. long,
+cut in an oval shape on the outside, tacked and glued to a piece of
+strong canvas on the inside. The end piece is 2 in. wide, into which two
+lift holes or grooves are cut and a lock attached in the middle of the
+edge. A drawer lock can be made as shown and attached to the back panel
+and operated by the back end of the roll top curtain when it is opened
+and closed.</p>
+
+<p>The top board, which is 34 by 54 in., can be fitted with end pieces as
+shown or left in one piece with the edges made rounding.</p>
+
+<p>At this point in the construction of the parts they can be put together.
+The sides of each pedestal are fastened together by screws passed
+through the 1-in. square pieces forming the partition and into the sides
+of the panels. When each pedestal is put together the lower back panel
+is fastened to them with screws turned into the pieces provided as
+stated in making the end panels. The top board is now adjusted with
+equal edges projecting and fastened in position with finishing nails. As
+the top panels cover directly over where the nails are driven, the heads
+will not show. The upper back panel is fastened to the curved ends and
+the whole top held to the top board with cast corner brackets that can
+be purchased at any hardware store. The top
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[66]</a></span>
+should not be drawn together too close before the 1/4-in. back board is
+put in the grooves and the roll top curtain placed in position.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 516px;">
+<img src="images/i-066.jpg" width="516" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Detail of Pigeonholes</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The detail showing the pigeon holes gives sizes for 30 openings 3 by 4
+in., two book stalls at the ends, 3 in. wide, and two small drawers.
+This frame is built up as shown from the 3/8-in. soft wood, and fastened
+in the back part of the top with small brads.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[67]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_ROMAN_CHAIR" id="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_ROMAN_CHAIR"></a>
+HOW TO MAKE A ROMAN CHAIR</h2>
+
+
+<p>In making this roman chair, as well as other articles of mission
+furniture, the materials can be ordered from the mill with much of the
+hard work completed. Order the stock to make this chair as follows:</p>
+
+<ul><li>4 posts, 1-7/8 by 1-7/8 by 30 in.</li>
+<li>2 top rails, 7/8 by 2-3/4 by 20 in.</li>
+<li>2 bottom rails, 7/8 by 2-1/4 by 20 in.</li>
+<li>2 rails, 7/8 by 4 by 16 in.</li>
+<li>2 side rails, 7/8 by 4 by 28 in.</li>
+<li>1 stretcher, 7/8 by 3 by 30 in.</li></ul>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-067.jpg" width="600" height="518" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">The Roman Chair</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Have all these pieces mill planed on the four sides straight and square,
+also have them sandpapered on the four sides of each. Plain sawed
+white<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[68]</a></span>
+or red oak finishes nicely and is easily obtained. The sizes
+are specified exact as to thickness and width, but the lengths are
+longer than is needed. This is to allow for cutting and fitting.</p>
+
+<p>Begin by squaring one end of each post; measure the length 28 in. and,
+placing all of them side by side, square a line across the four, saw,
+then plane these ends square. The top and bottom side rails are treated
+in a similar manner, their length being 19-1/8 in. each. These pieces
+extend right through the posts projecting 5/8 in. beyond the surface.
+The mortises in the posts must be cut smoothly and of exact size. Wood
+pins fasten these rails and posts together. The other rails have tenons
+1/2 by 3 in. shouldered on the two edges and one side. The mortise in
+the post is placed central. On the ends of the chair the shouldered side
+is turned in (see <a href="images/i-067.jpg">photograph</a>), while on the
+front and back they are turned out. Miter the ends of these tenons. These
+tenons are to be glued and clamped&mdash;the ends of the chair being put
+together first. When this is dry the sides are clamped. The stretcher
+should have its ends shouldered on the two edges so as to make a 2-1/2-in.
+tenon. Allow the tenons to extend 1-1/8 in. beyond the cross rail and cut
+mortises in these tenons for the keys.</p>
+
+<p>All projecting tenons, as well as the tops and bottoms of the posts,
+should be chamfered about 1/8 in. For the seat, screw cleats to the
+insides of the rails and place a platform of thin boards so that its top
+surface is 1/2 in. below the top of the rails.</p>
+
+<p>A cushion can be made, as shown in the photograph, by lacing with
+leather thongs two pieces of Spanish leather cut to proper length and
+width.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[69]</a></span>
+When nearly laced fill with any of the common upholsterer's fillings.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-069.jpg" width="600" height="360" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of Parts of Chair</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>For a brown stain, dissolve by boiling in 4 oz. of water, extract of
+logwood the size of a walnut. Apply hot and repeat until the desired
+color is obtained. Stains can be bought ready prepared, however, and are
+quite satisfactory. Finish by applying several coats of wax.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[70]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_SETTEE" id="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_SETTEE"></a>HOW TO MAKE A SETTEE</h2>
+
+
+<p>This handsome piece of mission furniture is designed to be made up in
+three different pieces as desired, the only changes necessary being in
+the length of the one front and the two back rails. The settee can be
+made into a three-cushion length by adding the length of another cushion
+to the dimensions of the one front and two back rails. A companion piece
+chair can be made by using suitable length rails to admit only one
+cushion. The following stock list of materials ordered mill-planed and
+sandpapered will be sufficient to make up the settee as illustrated. Oak
+is the most suitable wood which can be finished in either mission or a
+dark golden oak.</p>
+
+<ul><li>3 rails 1 by 4 by 52-1/4 in.</li>
+<li>4 end rails 1 by 4 by 24-1/4 in.</li>
+<li>4 posts 2-1/4 in. square by 34-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>13 slats 1/2 by 5 by 21-1/4 in.</li>
+<li>2 cleats 1 in. square by 51 in.</li></ul>
+
+
+
+<p>All the rails are mortised into the posts for a depth of 5/8 in., also
+the slats are mortised 5/8 in. into the rails. The material list gives
+the exact dimensions for the rails and slats as they will not need to be
+squared for entering the mortises, provided you are careful to get all
+lengths cut to dimensions. When cutting the mortises take care to get
+them square and clean. The posts have 1/2 in. extra added for squaring
+up and cutting the corners sloping on the top ends.</p>
+
+<p>The joints are all put together with glue. Nails can be driven into the
+posts intersecting the tenons of the rails on the inside, as they will
+not show and will help to make the settee more solid.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[71]</a></span></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-071.jpg" width="600" height="357" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">A Complete Two-Cushion Settee</span>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[72]</a></span></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-072.jpg" width="600" height="241" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of a Mission Settee</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The cushions can be made with or without springs as desired. If made
+without springs, 15 slats must be provided in the material list 1/2 in.
+thick, 2 in. wide and 24 in. long to be placed on the
+cleats fastened to the inside of each bottom rail. The two cleats are
+fastened one on each inside of the front and back rails with screws. The
+location as to height of these cleats will depend upon the kind of
+cushions used. The parts necessary to make the cushions with springs are
+as follows:</p>
+
+<ul><li>4 pieces 1 by 2-1/2 by 26 in.</li>
+<li>8 pieces 1 by 2-1/2 by 24 in.</li>
+<li>4 pieces 1 by 2-1/2 by 22 in.</li>
+<li>32 8-in. springs.</li>
+<li>2 pieces leather about 29 by 31 in.</li></ul>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[73]</a></span></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-073.jpg" width="600" height="409" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Details of the Cushion</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>An open box is made from two 26-in. and two 22-in. pieces, and across
+the bottom are mortised and set in four 24-in. pieces to form slats on
+which to set the springs. The tops of the springs are tied or anchored
+with stout cords running in both directions and fastened to the inside
+of the pieces forming the open box. These should be tied in such manner
+as to hold each spring so it cannot slip over and come in contact with
+another spring.</p>
+
+<p>Roan or pebbled leather are very popular for cushions for this style of
+furniture. The leather is drawn over the springs and tacked to the
+outside of the open box frame. When complete the cushions are set in
+loose on the cleats, which should, in this case, be placed about 1 in.
+from the top of the rails.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[74]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_PYROGRAPHERS_TABLE"
+id="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_PYROGRAPHERS_TABLE"></a>HOW TO MAKE A PYROGRAPHER'S TABLE</h2>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-074.jpg" width="600" height="398"  alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Convenient
+Pyrographer&#39;s Table</span></div>
+
+<p>Any pyrographer will appreciate the construction of the table and
+cabinet as illustrated. Anyone doing burnt wood work will know the
+annoyance of building up a steady support for the arm to the level of
+the article on which the work is to be done. The size of this table may
+be made to suit the surroundings and the space of the builder. Figure 1
+shows the table with a slot cut in the side support in which to place
+the thumb screw of the bracket as shown on top of the table. It will be
+noticed, Fig. 2, that while both drawer and cabinet are available for
+storing the apparatus, they are not in the way of the operator
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[75]</a></span>
+while sitting at his work; the drawer
+overhangs the knees and the cabinet is far enough back not to interfere
+with sitting up close to the work. The bracket shelf slides in the slot
+at the side of the table, and is fastened to any height by the thumb
+screw There is also a smaller slide bracket on the shelf to clamp
+irregular objects to the side of the table. The thumb screws, hinges and
+drawer pulls can be purchased from any hardware store. When the table is
+not in use for pyrography it can be used for a writing table or a round
+top provided and attached on which to play games. When used for this
+purpose the bracket, as well as the pyrographic outfit, is stowed away
+in the cabinet as shown in Fig. 3.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-075.jpg" width="600" height="577" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Storage for Apparatus</span>
+</div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[76]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="MISSION_STAINS" id="MISSION_STAINS"></a>MISSION STAINS</h2>
+
+
+
+<p>What is mission oak stain? There are many on the market, with hardly two
+alike in tone. The true mission oak stain may be said to show a dull
+gray, the flakes showing a reddish tint, while the grain of the wood
+will be almost a dead black. To produce such a stain take 1 lb. of drop
+black in oil and 1/2 oz, of rose pink in oil, adding a gill of best
+japan drier, thinning with three half-pints of turpentine. This will
+make about 1 qt. of stain. Use these proportions for a larger quantity
+of stain. Strain it through cheese cloth. Japan colors will give a
+quicker drying stain than that made with oil colors, and in this case
+omit the japan and add a little varnish to bind it.</p>
+
+<p>One of the most popular of all the fancy oaks has been that known as
+Flemish, and this in spite of its very somber color, says Wood Craft.
+There are several ways of producing Flemish finish; you can fill the
+wood with a paste filler strained with raw umber, and when dry apply a
+stain of transparent flat raw umber, and for the darker shades of finish
+use drop black with the umber. Varnish and rub down.</p>
+
+<p>According to a foreign technical journal, French workmen mahoganize
+various kinds of woods by the following method: The surface of the wood
+to be stained is made perfectly smooth. Then it is given a coating of
+dilute nitric acid which is rubbed well into the wood fiber. Then it is
+stained with a mixture made by dissolving 1-1/2 oz. of dragon's blood in
+a pint of alcohol, this solution being filtered, and then there is added
+to it one-third of its weight of sodium carbonate. Apply this mixture
+with a brush, and repeat the coats at intervals until the<span class='pagenum'><a
+name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[77]</a></span> surface has the appearance of polished
+mahogany. In case the luster should fail it may be restored by rubbing
+with a little raw linseed oil. The description of the process is meager,
+and hence he who would try it will have to experiment a little.</p>
+
+<p>A good cheap mission effect for oak is to mix together equal parts of
+boiled linseed oil and good asphaltum varnish, and apply this to the
+wood with a brush; in a minute or so you may rub off surplus with a rag,
+and when dry give a coat of varnish. A gallon of this stain will cover
+about 600 sq. ft.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="FILLING_OAK" id="FILLING_OAK"></a>FILLING OAK</h2>
+
+
+<p>A very good hardwood filler for oak, either for a natural or golden
+effect, may be made from two parts of turpentine and one part of raw
+linseed oil, with a small amount of good japan to dry in the usual time.
+To this liquid add bolted gilder's whiting to form a suitable paste, it
+may be made thin enough for use, if to be used at once, or into a stiff
+paste for future use, when it can be thinned down for use, says
+Woodworkers' Review. After applying a coat of filler, let stand until it
+turns gray, which requires about 20 minutes, depending upon the amount
+of japan in the filler, when it should be rubbed off with cotton waste
+or whatever you use for the purpose. A filler must be rubbed well into
+the wood, the surplus only being removed. The application of a coat of
+burnt umber stain to the wood before filling is in order, which will
+darken the wood to the proper depth if you rub off the surplus, showing
+the grain and giving a golden oak effect. The filling should stand at
+least a day and night before applying shellac and varnish.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[78]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="WAX_FINISHING" id="WAX_FINISHING"></a>WAX FINISHING</h2>
+
+
+<p>In wax-finishing hardwoods, use a paste filler and shellac varnish to
+get a good surface. Of course, the wax may also be rubbed into the
+unfilled wood but that gives you quite a different effect from the
+regular wax polish, says a correspondent of Wood Craft. With soft woods
+you first apply a stain, then apply a liquid filler or shellac,
+according to the quality of work to be done. The former for the cheaper
+job. The usual proportion of wax and turpentine is two parts of the
+former to one part of the latter, melting the wax first, then adding the
+spirits of turpentine. For reviving or polishing furniture you can add
+three or four times as much turpentine as wax, all these proportions to
+be by weight. To produce the desired egg-shell gloss, rub vigorously
+with a brush of stiff bristles or woolen rag.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="THE_FUMING_OF_OAK" id="THE_FUMING_OF_OAK"></a>THE FUMING OF OAK</h2>
+
+
+<p>Darkened oak always has a better appearance when fumed with ammonia.
+This process is rather a difficult one, as it requires an airtight case,
+but the description herewith given may be entered into with as large a
+case as the builder cares to construct.</p>
+
+<p>Oak articles can be treated in a case made from a tin biscuit box, or
+any other metal receptacle of good proportions, provided it is airtight.
+The oak to be fumed is arranged in the box so the fumes will entirely
+surround the piece; the article may be propped up with small sticks, or
+suspended by a string. The chief point is to see that no part of the
+wood is covered up and that all surfaces are exposed to the fumes. A
+saucer of ammonia is placed<span class='pagenum'>
+<a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[79]</a></span> in the bottom of the box, the lid or
+cover closed, and all joints sealed up by pasting heavy brown paper over
+them. Any leakage will be detected if the nose is placed near the tin
+and farther application of the paper will stop the holes. A hole may be
+cut in the cover and a piece of glass fitted in, taking care to have all
+the edges closed. The process may be watched through the glass and the
+article removed when the oak is fumed to the desired shade. Wood stained
+in this manner should not be French polished or varnished, but waxed.</p>
+
+<p>The process of waxing is simple: Cut some bees-wax into fine shreds and
+place them in a small pot or jar. Pour in a little turpentine, and set
+aside for half a day, giving it an occasional stir. The wax must be
+thoroughly dissolved and then more turpentine added until the
+preparation has the consistency of a thick cream. This can be applied to
+the wood with a rag and afterward brushed up with a stiff brush.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_BLACK_WAX" id="HOW_TO_MAKE_BLACK_WAX"></a>HOW TO MAKE BLACK WAX</h2>
+
+
+<p>When putting a wax finish on oak or any open-grained wood, the wax will
+often show white streaks in the pores of the wood. These streaks cannot
+be removed by rubbing or brushing. Prepared black wax can be purchased,
+but if you do not have any on hand, ordinary floor wax can be colored
+black. Melt the floor wax in a can placed in a bucket of hot water. When
+the wax has become liquid mix thoroughly into it a little drop black or
+lampblack. Allow the wax to cool and harden. This wax will not streak,
+but will give a smooth, glossy finish.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[80]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="THE_40_STYLES_OF_CHAIRS" id="THE_40_STYLES_OF_CHAIRS"></a>
+THE 40 STYLES OF CHAIRS</h2>
+
+
+<p>There are 40 distinct styles of chairs embracing the period from 3000
+B.C. to 1900 A.D.&mdash;nearly 7,000 years. Of all the millions of
+chairs made during the centuries, each one can be classified under one
+or more of the 40 general styles shown in the chart. This chart was
+compiled by the editor of Decorative Furniture. The Colonial does not
+appear on the chart because it classifies under the Jacobean and other
+styles. A condensed key to the chart follows:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p><b>Egyptian.&mdash;3000 B.C. to 500 B.C.</b>
+Seems to have been derived largely from the Early Asian. It influenced
+Assyrian and Greek decorations, and was used as a motif in some French
+Empire decoration. Not used in its entirety except for lodge rooms, etc.</p>
+
+<p><b>Grecian.&mdash;700 B.C. to 200 B.C.</b> Influenced by Egyptian and
+Assyrian styles. It had a progressive growth through the Doric, Ionic
+and Corinthian periods. It influenced the Roman style and the Pompeian,
+and all the Renaissance styles, and all styles following the
+Renaissance, and is still the most important factor in decorations
+today.</p>
+
+<p><b>Roman.&mdash;750 B.C. to 450 A.D.</b> Rome took her art entirely from
+Greece, and the Roman is purely a Greek development. The Roman
+style "revived" in the Renaissance, and in this way is still a prominent
+factor in modern decoration.</p>
+
+<p><b>Pompeian.&mdash;100 B.C. to 79 A.D.</b> Sometimes called the Grecian-Roman
+style, which well describes its components. The style we know
+as Greek was the Greek as used in public structures. The Pompeian
+is our best idea of Greek domestic decoration. Pompeii was long
+buried, but when rediscovered it promptly influenced all European
+styles, including Louis XVI, and the various Georgian styles.</p>
+
+<p><b>Byzantine.&mdash;300 A.D. to 1450 A.D.</b> The "Eastern Roman" style,
+originating in the removal of the capital of the Roman Empire to
+Constantinople (then called Byzantium). It is a combination of Persian
+and Roman. It influenced the various Moorish, Sacracenic and
+other Mohammedan styles.</p>
+
+<p><b>Gothic.&mdash;1100 to 1550.</b> It had nothing to do with the Goths, but
+was a local European outgrowth of the Romanesque. It spread all
+over Europe, and reached its climax of development about 1550. It
+was on the Gothic construction that the Northern European and
+English Renaissance styles were grafted to form such styles as the
+Elizabethan, etc.</p></div>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[81]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 386px;">
+<img src="images/i-081.jpg" width="386" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Chairs 1</span>
+</div>
+
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[82]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p><b>Moorish.&mdash;700 to 1600.</b> The various
+Mohammedan styles can all be traced to the ancient Persian through the
+Byzantine. The Moorish or Moresque was the form taken by the Mohammedans
+in Spain.</p>
+
+<p><b>Indian.&mdash;2000 B.C. to 1906 A.D.</b> The East Indian style is almost
+composite, as expected of one with a growth of nearly 4,000 years.
+It has been influenced repeatedly by outside forces and various
+religious   invasions, and has, in turn, influenced other far Eastern
+styles.</p>
+
+<p><b>Chinese.&mdash;3500 B.C. to 1906 A.D.</b> Another of the ancient styles.
+It had a continuous growth up to 230 B.C., since when it has not
+changed much. It has influenced Western styles, as in the Chippendale,
+Queen Anne, etc.</p>
+
+<p><b>Japanese.&mdash;1200 B.C. to 1906 A.D.</b> A style probably springing
+originally from China, but now absolutely distinct. It has influenced
+recent art in Europe and America, especially the "New Art" styles.</p>
+
+<p><b>Italian Gothic.&mdash;1100 to 1500.</b> The Italian Gothic differs from
+the European and English Gothic in clinging more closely to the
+Romanesque-Byzantine originals.</p>
+
+<p><b>Tudor.&mdash;1485 to 1558.</b> The earliest entry of the Renaissance into
+England. An application of Renaissance to the Gothic foundations. Its
+growth was into the Elizabethan.</p>
+
+<p><b>Italian Renaissance, Fifteenth Century.&mdash;1400 to 1500.</b> The birth
+century of the Renaissance. A seeking for revival of the old Roman
+and Greek decorative and constructive forms.</p>
+
+<p><b>Italian Renaissance, Sixteenth Century.&mdash;1500 to 1600.</b> A period
+of greater elaboration of detail and more freedom from actual Greek
+and Roman models.</p>
+
+<p><b>Italian Renaissance, Seventeenth Century.&mdash;1600 to 1700.</b> The
+period   of great elaboration and beginning of reckless ornamentation.</p>
+
+<p><b>Spanish Renaissance.&mdash;1500 to 1700.</b> A variation of the
+Renaissance spirit caused by the combination of three distinct
+styles&mdash;the Renaissance as known in Italy, the Gothic and the Moorish.
+In furniture   the Spanish Renaissance is almost identical with the
+Flemish, which it influenced.</p>
+
+<p><b>Dutch Renaissance.&mdash;1500 to 1700.</b> A style influenced alternately
+by the French and the Spanish. This style and the Flemish had a
+strong influence on the English William and Mary and Queen Anne
+styles, and especially on the Jacobean.</p>
+
+<p><b>German Renaissance.&mdash;1550 to 1700.</b> A style introduced by Germans
+who had gone to Italy to study. It was a heavy treatment of the
+Renaissance spirit, and merged into the German Baroque about 1700.</p>
+
+<p><b>Francis I.&mdash;1515 to 1549.</b> The introductory period when the
+Italian Renaissance found foothold in France. It is almost purely
+Italian, and was the forerunner of the Henri II.</p>
+
+<p><b>Henri II.&mdash;1549 to 1610.</b> In this the French Renaissance became
+differentiated from the Italian, assuming traits that were specifically
+French and that were emphasized in the next period.</p>
+
+<p><b>Louis XIII.&mdash;1616 to 1643.</b> A typically French style, in which
+but few traces of its derivation from the Italian remained. It was
+followed by the Louis XIV.</p>
+
+<p><b>Elizabethan.&mdash;1558 to 1603.</b> A compound style containing traces
+of the Gothic, much of the Tudor, some Dutch, Flemish and a little
+Italian. Especially noted for its fine wood carving.</p>
+
+<p><b>Jacobean.&mdash;1603 to 1689.</b> The English period immediately following
+the Elizabethan, and in most respects quite similar. The Dutch influence
+was, however, more prominent. The Cromwellian, which is
+included in this period, was identical with it.</p>
+
+<p><b>William and Mary.&mdash;1689 to 1702.</b> More Dutch influences. All
+furniture lighter and better suited to domestic purposes.</p></div>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[83]</a></span></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 384px;">
+<img src="images/i-083.jpg" width="384" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Chairs 2</span>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[84]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p><b>Queen Anne.&mdash;1702 to 1714.</b> Increasing
+Dutch influences. Jacobean influence finally discarded. Chinese
+influence largely present.</p>
+
+<p><b>Louis XIV.&mdash;1643 to 1715.</b> The greatest French style. An entirely
+French creation, marked by elegance and dignity. Toward the
+end of the period it softened into the early Rococo.</p>
+
+<p><b>Georgian.&mdash;1714 to 1820.</b> A direct outgrowth of the Queen Anne,
+tempered by the prevailing French styles. It includes Chippendale,
+Hepplewhite and Sheraton, but these three great cabinetmakers were
+sufficiently distinct from the average Georgian to be worthy separate
+classification.</p>
+
+<p><b>Chippendale.&mdash;1754 to 1800.</b> The greatest English cabinet style.
+Based on the Queen Anne, but drawing largely from the Rococo,
+Chinese and Gothic, he produced three distinct types, viz.: French
+Chippendale, Chinese Chippendale and Gothic Chippendale. The last
+is a negligible quantity.</p>
+
+<p><b>Louis XV.&mdash;1715 to 1774.</b> The Rococo period. The result of the
+efforts of French designers to enliven the Louis XIV, and to evolve
+a new style out of one that had reached its logical climax.</p>
+
+<p><b>Hepplewhite.&mdash;1775 to 1800.</b> Succeeded Chippendale as the popular
+English cabinetmaker. By many he is considered his superior. His
+work is notable for a charming delicacy of line and design.</p>
+
+<p><b>Louis XVI.&mdash;1774 to 1793.</b> The French style based on a revival
+of Greek forms, and influenced by the discovery of the ruins of
+Pompeii.</p>
+
+<p><b>Sheraton.&mdash;1775 to 1800.</b> A fellow cabinetmaker, working at same
+time as Hepplewhite. One of the Colonial styles (Georgian).</p>
+
+<p><b>R. &amp; J. Adam.&mdash;1762 to 1800.</b> Fathers of an English classic
+revival. Much like the French Louis XVI and Empire styles in many
+respects.</p>
+
+<p><b>Empire.&mdash;1804 to 1814.</b> The style created during the Empire of
+Napoleon I. Derived from classic Roman suggestions, with some
+Greek and Egyptian influences.</p>
+
+<p><b>New Arts.&mdash;1900 to date.</b> These are various worthy attempts by
+the designers of various nations to create a new style. Some of the
+results are good, and they are apt to be like the "little girl who had
+a little curl that hung in the middle of her forehead," in that "when
+they are good they are very, very good, but when they are bad they
+are horrid."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[85]</a></span></p></div>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 380px;">
+<img src="images/i-085.jpg" width="380" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Chairs 3</span>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[86]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 380px;">
+<img src="images/i-086.jpg" width="380" height="317" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Chairs 4</span>
+</div>
+
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[87]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_PIANO_BENCH" id="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_PIANO_BENCH"></a>
+HOW TO MAKE A PIANO BENCH</h2>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-087.jpg" width="600" height="321" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Piano Bench</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>All the material used in the making of this piano
+bench is 1 in. thick, excepting the two rails, which
+are 7/8 in. thick. The bench can be made from any
+of the furniture woods, but the case may demand
+one made from mahogany. If so, this wood can be
+purchased from a piano factory. The following
+stock list of materials may be ordered from a mill,
+planed and sandpapered:</p>
+
+<ul><li>1 top, 1 by 16 by 36-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>2 ends, 1 by 14 by 18 in.</li>
+<li>1 stretcher, 1 by 4 by 31-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>2 side rails, 7/8 by 4 by 29-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>2 keys, 1 by 1 by 3-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>6 cleats, 1 by 1 by 4 in.</li></ul>
+
+
+<p>The dimensions given, with the exception of the
+keys and cleats, are 1/2 in. longer than necessary for
+squaring up the ends.</p>
+
+<p>The two rails are cut slanting from a point 1-1/2
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[88]</a></span>
+in. from each end to the center, making them only
+3 in. wide in the middle. The rails are "let into"
+the edges of the ends so the outside of the rails and
+end boards will be flush. The joints are put together
+with glue and screws. The cleats are fastened
+with screws to the inside of the rails and to
+the top. The stretcher has a tenon cut on each
+end which fits into a mortise cut in each end. The
+tenons will have sufficient length to cut the small
+mortise for the key.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-088.jpg" width="600" height="222" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Piano Bench Details</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The kind of wood used will determine the color
+of the stain for the finish. This also depends on
+matching other pieces of furniture.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[89]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_MISSION_SHAVING" id="HOW_TO_MAKE_A_MISSION_SHAVING"></a>
+HOW TO MAKE A MISSION SHAVING STAND</h2>
+
+<p>This attractive and useful piece of mission furniture will be
+appreciated by the person that does his own shaving. The shaving stand
+can be made at home by a handy man in his spare time as the stock can be
+ordered from a mill ready for making the joints and attaching the few
+pieces of hardware. The following is a stock list of materials:</p>
+
+
+<ul><li>4 posts 1-1/2 in. square by 50-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>4 slats 7/8 by 1 by 32-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>2 cross rails 1 by 1-1/2 by 15 in.</li>
+<li>2 end rails 1 by 1-1/2 by 13 in.</li>
+<li>1 top 7/8 by 16-1/2 by 19-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>1 bottom 7/8 by 15 by 17 in.</li>
+<li>2 ends 7/8 by 12-1/2 in. square.</li>
+<li>1 back 7/8 by 12-1/2 by 14-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>1 door 7/8 by 6-1/2 by 12-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>2 drawer ends 7/8 by 5-1/2 by 7-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>1 partition 7/8 by 12 by 14 in.</li>
+<li>1 partition 7/8 by 7 by 14 in.</li>
+<li>7 pieces of soft wood 1/2 by 7-1/2 by 12 in.</li>
+<li>2 posts 1 in. square by 10-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>1 bottom piece 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 18-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>4 mirror frame pieces 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 14-1/2 in.</li>
+<li>2 sticks for pins.</li>
+<li>2 hinges</li>
+<li>1 lock</li>
+<li>2 drawer pulls</li>
+<li>1 beveled glass mirror 11-1/2 by 11-1/2 in.</li></ul>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 536px;">
+<img src="images/i-090.jpg" width="536" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Shaving Stand Details</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>While this piece of furniture can be made in any
+kind of wood, the novice will find that quarter-sawed
+oak will work up and finish better than the other
+woods. The stock list given has dimensions 1/2 in.
+larger in some instances for dressing and squaring
+where necessary.</p>
+
+<p>The tenons and mortises are first cut for the
+crosspieces at the bottom of the posts, and, as it is
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[90]</a></span>
+best to use dowels at the top, holes are bored in the
+bottom piece and also the ends of the slats for pins.
+The bottom piece is also fastened to the posts with
+dowels. The bottom must have a square piece cut
+out from each corner almost the same size as the
+posts. When setting the sides together the end
+board and posts can be doweled and glued together
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[91]</a></span>
+and after drying well the posts can be spread apart
+far enough to insert the bottom rail and two slats.
+The rail and slats should be tried for a bit before
+putting on any glue, which may save some trouble.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[92]</a></span></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 265px;">
+<img src="images/i-091.jpg" width="265" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Shaving Stand Complete</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>After the sides are put together, the back is put in and glued. The top
+is then put on and fastened with cleats from the inside. The partitions
+are put in as shown and the door fitted. Two drawers are made from the
+ends and the soft wood material. The drawer ends may be supplied with
+wood pulls of the same material or matched with metal the same as used
+for the hinges.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-092.jpg" width="600" height="395" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Mirror Frame and Standards
+Details</span></div>
+
+<p>The pieces for the mirror frame must be rabbeted 1/2 in. deep to take
+the glass, and the ends joined together with a miter at each corner. The
+two short posts are tenoned and mortises cut in the bottom piece for
+joints and these joints well glued together. The bottom piece is then
+fastened to the top board of the stand. This will form the standards in
+which to swing the mirror and its frame. This is done with two pins
+inserted in holes bored through the standards and into the mirror frame.</p>
+
+<p>After the parts are all put together, cleaned and
+sandpapered, the stand is ready for the finish.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[93]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="A_MISSION_WASTE-PAPER_BASKET" id="A_MISSION_WASTE-PAPER_BASKET"></a>
+A MISSION WASTE-PAPER BASKET</h2>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 455px;">
+<img src="images/i-093.jpg" width="455" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Waste-Paper
+Basket to Match Library Table</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The basket shown in the accompanying sketch
+is designed to be used with a library table having
+slats in the ends and wooden handles on the drawers.
+The finish is made to match that of the table
+by fuming, when completely assembled, in a large-size
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[94]</a></span>
+size, clean garbage can, with fumes of concentrated
+ammonia.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[95]</a></span></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 252px;">
+<img src="images/i-094.jpg" width="252" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Detail of Waste-Paper Basket</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The following quarter-sawed white-oak stock
+should be procured in the exact dimensions given.
+This may be had, planed and cut to lengths, from
+a mill for a slight extra charge. It is advisable not
+to have them sandpapered, as the very coarse sandpaper
+generally used, gives a bad surface for finishing.</p>
+
+
+<ul><li>4 posts, 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 16-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>4 rails, 3/4 by 3 by 10-1/4 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>4 rails, 3/4 by 2 by 10-1/4 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>12 slats, 3/8 by 2-1/4 by 9-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>4 handle pieces, 1 by 1 by 2-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>2 handle pieces, 1/2 by 1/2 by 6 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>1 bottom, 3/8 by 9-1/2 by 9-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li></ul>
+
+<p>See that the posts are absolutely square cross section. Mark with a
+pencil&mdash;not gauge&mdash;the chamfers on the ends of the posts and
+plane them off.</p>
+
+<p>Carefully mark the tenons on the ends of all the rails with a knife and
+gauge lines. Be sure that the distance from the tenon shoulder at one
+end of rail to the shoulder at the other end is exactly the same on each
+rail. Cut the tenons, using a backsaw and chisel.</p>
+
+<p>Arrange the pieces as they are to stand in the finished basket, and
+number each tenon and mortise. Mark all the mortises on the posts, being
+sure to keep the distances between the top and lower rail the same on
+each post. Cut each mortise to fit the correspondingly numbered tenon.
+Next, mark the mortises for the slats in the rails, allowing the whole
+slat to go in 1/4 in.</p>
+
+<p>The handles are next in order. The pieces going into the rail should be
+fastened with a round
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[96]</a></span>
+1/2-in. tenon cut on one end and glued in place. The crosspiece should
+be mortised all the way through these pieces and held in place by a brad
+from the under side.</p>
+
+<p>Now put the whole basket together without gluing, in order that errors,
+if any, may be detected.</p>
+
+<p>If everything fits perfectly, the basket is ready to be glued. For best
+results hot glue should be used. First glue up two opposite sides with
+the slats in place. Clamps must be used. When these have set for at
+least 24 hours, the other rails and slats may be glued in place and
+clamped. It is a good idea to pin the tenons in place with two 1-in.
+brads driven from the inside.</p>
+
+<p>The handles are then glued in place, using hand screws to hold them
+until the glue sets. The bottom should rest on thin cleats, without
+being nailed to them, so that it may be removed when the basket is to be
+emptied of small papers, etc.</p>
+
+<p>Before applying the stain, see that all glue spots are removed and all
+surfaces sanded to perfect smoothness. If a fumed finish is not desired,
+any good stain may be used, after which a thin coat of shellac and two
+coats of wax should be applied. Allow plenty of time for drying between
+the coats.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="A_CELLARETTE_PEDESTAL" id="A_CELLARETTE_PEDESTAL"></a>
+A CELLARETTE PEDESTAL</h2>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 304px;">
+<img src="images/i-097.jpg" width="304" height="600" alt=""/><br />
+<span class="caption">Plain-Oak
+Cellarette Pedestal</span></div>
+
+<p>The illustration shows a unique article for the
+den. It serves as a pedestal and has one side which
+opens on hinges allowing the inside to be used as a
+smoker's cabinet or cellarette. All the lines are
+straight and the corners square, making it easy to
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[97]</a></span>
+construct. White oak will make up best, although
+ash, birch or southern pine may be used with good
+effect.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[98]</a></span>
+Stock of the following sizes should be bought,
+surfaced and cut to width and length:</p>
+
+<ul><li>2 top pieces, 7/8 by 12 by 12 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 base pieces, 7/8 by 14 by 14 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 sides, 7/8 by 8 by 35-5/8 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 back, 7/8 by 6-1/4 by 35-5/8 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 door, 7/8 by 6-1/4 by 34-3/4 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>4 blocks, 7/8 by 4 by 4 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>4 shelves, 7/8 by 6-1/4 by 6-1/4 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>4 pieces, 7/8 by 1 by 10 in., S-4-S.</li></ul>
+
+
+<p>Make the top and base of two pieces, glued and
+screwed together with the grain crossed. This
+method prevents warping. To keep the end grain
+from showing, a strip of 3/8-in. lumber may be put
+on all around as shown in the drawing.</p>
+
+<p>Have the sides, front and back squared up perfectly.
+The sides are to overlap the back and to be
+fastened to it with round-head brass or blue screws.
+To the center of the top and base attach one of the
+6-1/4-in. square pieces. Over these, fit the sides and
+back and fasten them with screws or nails. The
+four corner blocks are now put under the base.</p>
+
+<p>Two or more shelves may be set in as shown.
+Brass or copper hinges will look well if a dark stain
+is to be used.</p>
+
+<p>Around the sides and back a 1-in. strip should be
+fastened to the base to give added strength.</p>
+
+<p>If a dull finish is desired, apply two coats of stain
+and two of prepared wax. If a polished surface is
+wanted, first fill the pores of the wood with any
+standard filler, which can be purchased at a paint
+store. After this has dried partly, rub off any surplus
+filler, rubbing across the grain of the wood.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[99]</a></span>
+When perfectly dry apply one coat of shellac and
+as many coats of varnish as desired, rubbing down
+each coat, except the last, with No. 00 sandpaper
+and pumice stone.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 468px;">
+<img src="images/i-099.jpg" width="468" height="600" alt=""/><br />
+<span class="caption">Detail of Cellarette
+Pedestal</span></div>
+
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[100]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="A_DRESSER" id="A_DRESSER"></a>A DRESSER</h2>
+
+
+<p>The dresser shown in the illustration was made
+of quarter-sawed white oak and finished golden and
+waxed. The mirror is of beveled glass and the following
+is the stock bill:</p>
+
+
+<ul><li>1 top, 3/4 by 19-1/2 by 33 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>4 posts, 1-3/4 by 1-3/4 by 28 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>4 end rails, 3/4 by 2-1/4 by 17 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>4 stiles, 3/4 by 2-1/2 by 20 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 panels, 3/16 by 12 by 18 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>3 facings, 3/4 by 2-1/4 by 29 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 top frame pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 32 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 top frame pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 19 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 mirror supports, 1 by 2 by 33 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 mirror support, 3/4 by 2-1/2 by 33 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 drawer front, 3/4 by 7-1/4 by 28 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 drawer front, 3/4 by 6-1/4 by 28 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 drawer fronts, 3/4 by 5-1/4 by 14 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 partition, 3/4 by 1 by 6 in.</li>
+<li>2 mirror-frame pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 40 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 mirror-frame pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 20 in., S-2-S.</li></ul>
+
+
+
+<p>The following material list may be of common stock and not
+quarter-sawed:</p>
+
+
+<ul><li>Mirror-backing pieces equivalent to 1/4 by 18-1/2 by 36 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 cleats, 3/4 by 2 by 10 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>4 drawer-support frame pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 29 in.</li>
+<li>7 drawer-support frame pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 15 in.</li>
+<li>Slides taken from scrap stock, 3/4 by 1 by 15 in.</li>
+<li>3 back pieces, 3/4 by 2-1/4 by 28 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 back pieces, 1/4 by 8 by 28 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>8 drawer sides, 1/2 by 7-1/4 by 17 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 drawer backs, 3/8 by 7 by 27 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 drawer backs, 3/8 by 7 by 13 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 drawer bottoms, 3/8 by 15 by 27 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 drawer bottoms, 3/8 by 15 by 13 in., S-2-S.</li></ul>
+
+
+
+<p>In working up the various parts proceed in the usual manner. If not
+thoroughly familiar with the various tool processes involved, it will be
+necessary to investigate pieces of near-by furniture and to read up some
+good text dealing with the processes involved.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[101]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 297px;">
+<img src="images/i-101.jpg" width="297" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Dresser in Quarter-Sawed Oak</span>
+</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[102]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The exact size of the mirror is 18 by 36 in. and
+the frame should be rabbeted to correspond.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 491px;">
+<img src="images/i-102.jpg" width="491" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Detail of the Dresser</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>For a finish, a coat of paste filler colored so as to <span class='pagenum'><a
+name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[103]</a></span> give a rich golden brown should be
+applied first. Allow this to harden, after rubbing and polishing it in
+the usual manner, then apply a thin coat of shellac. Sand this lightly
+when hard, and over this apply a coat of orange shellac. Over the
+shellac put several coats of some good rubbing wax and polish each coat
+well. If a striking contrast is wanted for the medullary rays of the
+quartering, apply a golden-oak stain first. Sand this lightly, then
+apply a second coat diluted one-half with solvent and sand again
+lightly. Apply a thin coat of shellac, then, when dry, sand lightly and
+apply paste, and proceed as before.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="A_MISSION_SIDEBOARD" id="A_MISSION_SIDEBOARD"></a>A MISSION SIDEBOARD</h2>
+
+
+<p>Oak is the most suitable material for making this
+sideboard and it should be first-class stock, planed
+and cut to the dimensions given in the following
+list:</p>
+
+
+<ul><li>1 top, 7/8 by 22 by 48 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 top shelf, 7/8 by 12 by 48 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 bottom, 7/8 by 22 by 48 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 back posts, 2 by 2 by 57 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>2 front posts, 2 by 2 by 36 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>2 standards, 2 by 2 by 20 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>2 mirror rails, 7/8 by 2 by 47 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 mirror rails, 7/8 by 2 by 20 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>3 front and back rails, 7/8 by 3 by 46 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>4 end rails, 7/8 by 3 by 20 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>4 standard rails, 7/8 by 2 by 10 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 vertical pieces, 7/8 by 19-1/2 by 22 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 horizontal piece, 7/8 by 22 by 14-1/4 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 drawer front, 7/8 by 6 by 14-1/4 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 piece, 7/8 by 3 by 3 in.</li>
+<li>4 vertical door pieces, 7/8 by 2 by 17 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>4 horizontal door pieces, 7/8 by 2 by 15 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 drawer sides, 7/8 by 5 by 14 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 drawer bottom, 1/4 by 14 by 14-1/4 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 back panel, 1/4 by 16-1/2 by 44-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 door panels, 1/4 by 10-1/2 by 15-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 side panels, 1/4 by 18-1/2 by 16-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li></ul>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[104]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 531px;">
+<img src="images/i-104.jpg" width="531" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Detail of the Mission Sideboard</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Begin work by cutting the posts to the length indicated in the detail
+drawing. The top ends are tapered with a 1/2-in. slant. These posts are
+cut in pairs and it is best to stand them up in the same<span class='pagenum'><a
+name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[105]</a></span> position they will be in the
+finished sideboard, and mark the sides to be mortised with a pencil.
+Also cut the grooves into which the panels are to fit. These are to be
+1/4 in. wide and a little over 1/4 in. deep.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 486px;">
+<img src="images/i-105.jpg" width="486" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Mission Sideboard in Quarter-Sawed Oak</span></div>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[106]</a></span>
+The rails are cut with tenon ends to match the mortises, and also have
+grooves to receive the panels.</p>
+
+<p>The bottom part of the back is closed with a panel and two rails, one at
+the same height from the floor as the front bottom rail, and the top one
+even with the under side of the top. The large panel is for the opening
+thus formed.</p>
+
+<p>These parts are now put together, using plenty of good hot glue, and
+spreading it well on the mortises and tenon ends.</p>
+
+<p>When drawing the frame together with the clamps, care must be taken to
+get it square.</p>
+
+<p>After the glue is hard enough to remove the clamps, the top and bottom
+are put in place. The corners of the top are notched out to fit around
+the posts, while the bottom is cut to fit on the inside of the rails and
+is held in place by putting screws in at an angle through the bottom
+into the rails. The top is also fastened in this way, except that the
+screws are run through the rails into the top.</p>
+
+<p>The two vertical pieces are now put in place. Drive nails through the
+bottom and into these pieces. On the top end use screws driven at an
+angle. Glue may be used if desired.</p>
+
+<p>The doors are made to match these openings. The corners are mitered and
+the backs rabbeted to receive the panels. These panels may be made in
+art glass if so desired.</p>
+
+<p>The horizontal piece for the drawer to rest upon is now put in place and
+fastened by driving nails through the vertical pieces. The drawer is
+made to fit this opening, and it should be lined with velvet
+to keep the silverware in good condition.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[107]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The standards and shelves are put on as shown
+in the drawing. The mirror is put in a frame, which
+is made to fit the back opening and has the corners
+mitered and the back rabbeted to receive the mirror.</p>
+
+<p>Thoroughly scrape and sandpaper all parts that
+are visible. The sideboard is now ready to be finished
+as desired.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="A_HALL_OR_WINDOW_SEAT" id="A_HALL_OR_WINDOW_SEAT"></a>A HALL OR WINDOW SEAT</h2>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-107.jpg" width="600" height="467" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Seat Made of Quarter-Sawed Oak</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>A simple design for a hall or window seat is shown in the accompanying
+sketch and detail drawing. Anyone who has a few sharp tools, and is at
+all handy with them, can make this useful and attractive piece of
+furniture in a few spare hours.<span class='pagenum'>
+<a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[108]</a></span> Quarter-sawed oak is the best wood
+to use in its construction, as it looks best when finished and is easy
+to procure. If the stock is ordered from the mill ready cut to length,
+squared and sanded, much of the labor will be saved. The following is a
+list of the material needed:</p>
+
+
+<ul><li>4 corner posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 28 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>2 side rails, 3/4 by 2-1/2 by 36-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>2 end rails, 3/4 by 4 by 14-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>2 side braces, 1 by 1 by 36-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>2 end braces, 1 by 1 by 14-1/2 in. S-4-S.</li>
+<li>1 seat, 1 by 16 by 35-3/4 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>2 top end braces, 3/4 by 2 by 14-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>6 slats, 3/4 by 2 by 6-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li></ul>
+
+
+
+<p>Square up the four posts and lay out the mortises according to the
+drawing. To do this, lay them on a flat surface with the ends square and
+mark them with a try-square. The tenons on the end and side rails are
+laid out in the same manner as the posts. The end rails should be marked
+and mortises cut for the upright slats as shown in the detail drawing.
+Fit the end and side braces with mortise and tenon joints.</p>
+
+<p>The two end frames can now be glued and clamped together and set away to
+dry. Put all the parts together before gluing to see that they fit
+square and tight.</p>
+
+<p>The seat should be made of one piece if possible, otherwise two or more
+boards will have to be glued together. The corners should be cut out to
+fit around the posts. It rests on the side rails and cleats fastened to
+the inner side of the end rails.</p>
+
+<p>When the window seat is complete go over it carefully and scrape all the
+surplus glue from about the joints, as the finish will not take where
+there is any glue. Remove all rough spots with fine sandpaper,<span class='pagenum'><a
+name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[109]</a></span> then apply the stain best liked,
+which may be any one of the many mission stains supplied by the trade
+for this purpose. If this window seat is well made and finished, it will
+be an ornament to any home.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-109.jpg" width="600" height="306" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Detail of the Hall or Window Seat</span>
+</div>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="A_MISSION_PLANT_STAND" id="A_MISSION_PLANT_STAND"></a>A MISSION PLANT STAND</h2>
+
+
+<p>For the mission plant stand shown in the illustration
+secure the following list of quarter-sawed
+white-oak stock, cut and finished to size:</p>
+
+
+<ul><li>1 top, 3/4 by 15-1/2 by 15-1/2 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>4 posts, 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 20 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>4 rails, 3/4 by 3 by 11 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 rails, 3/4 by 2 by 11 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 shelf, 3/4 by 6 by 10 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>4 slats, 1/4 by 2 by 12-1/4 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 slats, 1/4 by 2 by 12-3/4 in., S-2-S.</li></ul>
+
+
+
+<p>Test all surfaces of the posts with a try-square to see that they are
+square with each other. Lay out the tenons on the ends of the rails as
+shown in the sketch and cut with a tenon saw and chisel. Arrange<span class='pagenum'><a
+name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[110]</a></span> the posts and rails as they are to
+stand and number each tenon and mortise. Lay out the mortises in the
+legs, taking the measurements directly from the tenon which is to fit
+that mortise. Cut the mortises, first having bored to the depth with a
+1/4-in. bit.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-110.jpg" width="600" height="398" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Detail of the Plant Stand</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The slats should now be made and mortised into
+the top rail 1/4 in. They come outside of the lower
+rail and are held to it with two small brads, fancy-headed
+tacks, or round-head screws.</p>
+
+<p>In laying out the mortises for the lower rails,
+care must be taken to have them set 1/8 in. farther
+in than the upper rails so the slats may come
+outside.</p>
+
+<p>Set up the stand without glue or screws to see
+that all pieces fit accurately. Then glue up the sides
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[111]</a></span>
+with the slats first. After these have set for 24
+hours, fit in the other two rails and the shelf. Three
+flat-head screws should be used to hold the shelf
+in place. These must be placed so the slats will
+cover them when they are attached.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 501px;">
+<img src="images/i-111.jpg" width="501" height="600" alt=""/>
+<br /><span class="caption">Complete Plant Stand</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>When this work is completed it is ready for the top. A good method of
+attaching the top is shown in the sketch. The screws used for fastening
+should be 2-in. No. 10. Bore into the rail 1-1/2 in. with a bit 1/16 in.
+larger than the head of the screw. Then bore through the rest of the way
+with a bit a little <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112"
+id="Page_112">[112]</a></span> larger than the shank of the screw. Thus a
+little space is left for expansion and shrinkage of the top.</p>
+
+<p>Scrape and sandpaper thoroughly to remove all marks or glue spots.
+Finish with two coats of weathered-oak stain, followed by two coats of
+black wax.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="A_BEDSIDE_MEDICINE_STAND" id="A_BEDSIDE_MEDICINE_STAND"></a>
+A BEDSIDE MEDICINE STAND</h2>
+
+
+<p>The accompanying sketch and detail drawing
+show a design of a bedside stand. This is a very
+desirable piece of furniture and is simple and easy
+to make. Quarter-sawed oak is the best wood to
+use in its construction. The material should be
+ordered from the mill ready cut to length, squared
+and sanded. The following list of material will be
+required:</p>
+
+
+<ul><li>4 posts, 1-3/4 by 1-3/4 by 33 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>1 top board, 1 by 19 by 19 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>3 intermediate boards, 3/4 by 15-1/2 by 17 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>2 side boards, 3/4 by 5 by 15-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>1 back board, 3/4 by 4-1/4 by 14-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>4 side rails, 3/4 by 2 by 16 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>1 door, 3/4 by 9 by 14-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>1 back board, 3/4 by 10-1/4 by 14-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>2 panels, 3/8 by 9-1/2 by 15 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>6 slats, 1/4 by 1 by 8-3/4 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>1 drawer front, 3/4 by 4-1/4 by 14-1/2 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>2 sides for drawer, 1/2 by 4-1/4 by 16 in., S-4-S.</li>
+<li>1 back for drawer, 1/2 by 4-1/4 by 13-1/2 in., soft wood.</li>
+<li>1 bottom for drawer, 1/2 by 13-1/2 by 15 in., soft wood.</li></ul>
+
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 375px;">
+<img src="images/i-113.jpg" width="375" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Medicine Stand in Quarter-Sawed Oak</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Start work on the four posts by rounding the top corners and shaping the
+feet as shown. The four posts are identical and the mortises should be
+laid out on all four at once so as to get them all alike. These should
+be carefully cut with a sharp chisel. On the inner surface of each leg
+cut a groove to <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[113]</a></span> hold the side boards of the lower compartment.
+Next prepare the two wide and the four narrow crosspieces, tenoning them
+to fit the mortises already cut in the legs. The lower crosspieces
+should also have grooves cut in them to hold the side boards of the
+compartment. The two complete sides can now be glued and clamped
+together and set away to dry. While they are drying the remaining parts
+of the stand can be made. The three horizontal boards are now made by
+notching out the corners to fit around the legs. They are supported by
+fastening small cleats to the inner surface of each crosspiece.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/i-114.jpg" width="600" height="482" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Detail of the Medicine Stand</span></div>
+
+<p>The two ends can now be set up and connected. Notch out the corners of
+the top board and fit it in place. The top is fastened down by means of
+screws set in at an angle from below. The back boards can be of soft
+wood and are fastened in place in the<span class='pagenum'> <a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[115]</a></span> usual manner. The door
+should be of one piece if possible and should have suitable hinges and a
+catch.</p>
+
+<p>Make and fit the drawer in place, and the stand is ready for the finish.
+First scrape all the surplus glue from about the points so the stain
+will not be kept from the wood. Finish smooth with fine sandpaper, then
+apply stain of the color desired.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="A_MISSION_HALL_CHAIR" id="A_MISSION_HALL_CHAIR"></a>A MISSION
+HALL CHAIR</h2>
+
+
+<p>This hall chair is designed to take up as little
+room as possible. For its construction the following
+stock will be needed:</p>
+
+
+<ul><li>1 back, 7/8 by 14 by 44 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>2 sides, 7/8 by 14 by 17 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 seat, 7/8 by 14 by 14 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 stretcher, 7/8 by 6 by 16 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 brace, 7/8 by 5 by 11 in., S-2-S.</li>
+<li>1 piece, 7/8 by 7/8 by 44 in., for cleats.</li></ul>
+
+
+
+<p>These dimensions are for finished pieces, therefore 1/4 in. should be
+allowed for planing if the stock cannot be secured finished.</p>
+
+<p>Lay out and cut the design on the back, sides, and brace. To cut the
+openings, first bore a hole near one corner to get the blade of a coping
+saw through and proceed to saw to the lines. Smooth the edges after
+sawing by taking a thin shaving with a sharp chisel. A file will not
+leave a good surface.</p>
+
+<p>Mark the tenons on the ends of the stretcher and cut them with a backsaw
+and make smooth with a chisel. From the tenons mark the mortises in the
+sides through which they are to pass.
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[116]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 437px;">
+<img src="images/i-116.jpg" width="437" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Detail of the Hall Chair</span>
+</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[117]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 285px;">
+<img src="images/i-117.jpg" width="285" height="600" alt=""/>
+<span class="caption">Complete Hall Chair in Plain Oak</span>
+</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[118]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>To cut these mortises, first bore a row of holes with a 5/8 in. bit,
+boring halfway from each side so as not to split off any pieces. Now
+make of scrap material the two keys and from them mark the small
+mortises in the tenons.</p>
+
+<p>Before putting the chair together, the cleats for holding the seat
+should be fastened to the sides, back and brace. Use flat-head screws
+for this purpose. Then put the sides and stretcher together, and fasten
+the back to the sides with flat-head screws.</p>
+
+<p>The brace should be put in next, using three round-head screws in each
+end. There only remains the top, which is held by screws through the
+cleats from the under side.</p>
+
+<p>Stain with two coats of weathered or mission-oak stain, and then apply a
+thin coat of "under-lac" or shellac and two coats of wax.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 120px;">
+<img src="images/i-118.jpg" width="120" height="79" alt=""/>
+</div>
+
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 95%;" />
+<h3>Transcriber's Notes:</h3>
+
+<ul>
+<li>Folio 84: "Chipppendale" changed to Chippendale.</li>
+<li>Folio 90: "2 drawer ends 7/8 x ? x 7-1/2" was changed to an assumed<br />
+5-1/2 from context of the illustration.</li>
+<li>Table of Contents was moved to front of document.</li>
+<li>A List of Illustrations was added.</li>
+<li>Captions were added to illustrations for clarity at:</li>
+<li>Folio 35, 62, 64, 66, 81, 83, 85, 86, 88, and 90.</li>
+</ul>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Mission Furniture, by H. H. Windsor
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MISSION FURNITURE ***
+
+***** This file should be named 23770-h.htm or 23770-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/3/7/7/23770/
+
+Produced by K. Nordquist, Ross Wilburn and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-004.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-004.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6306ce5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-004.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-006.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-006.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..833c28b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-006.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-009.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-009.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cbc509f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-009.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-011.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-011.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8ce352e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-011.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-012.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-012.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4774e0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-012.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-014.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-014.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8325d88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-014.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-016.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-016.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..10af73f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-016.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-018.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-018.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8e94359
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-018.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-020.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-020.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa66152
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-020.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-023.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-023.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df21298
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-023.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-024.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-024.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..028d57d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-024.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-027.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-027.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4fd3ecf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-027.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-028.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-028.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0ddf868
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-028.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-029.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-029.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9a4d1b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-029.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-030.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-030.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5e6e950
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-030.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-032.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-032.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d7679c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-032.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-035a.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-035a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2b8c267
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-035a.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-035b.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-035b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..163d34b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-035b.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-037.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-037.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5240674
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-037.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-039.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-039.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..367522a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-039.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-043.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-043.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3976dba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-043.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-045.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-045.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ceaa25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-045.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-047.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-047.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e4e943
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-047.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-048.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-048.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a0e6197
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-048.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-049.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-049.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5a45a9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-049.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-050.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-050.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..411ac42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-050.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-052.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-052.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2522c44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-052.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-053.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-053.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bffb7bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-053.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-054.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-054.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0f3002a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-054.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-056.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-056.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..308cf23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-056.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-057.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-057.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..56e6c3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-057.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-058.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-058.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1e12d5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-058.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-059.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-059.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..124ed84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-059.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-061.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-061.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a12786c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-061.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-062.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-062.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e87fac7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-062.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-064.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-064.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a07a4da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-064.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-066.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-066.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3dfa059
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-066.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-067.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-067.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..09a9789
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-067.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-069.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-069.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8905f36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-069.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-071.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-071.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7fd8a02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-071.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-072.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-072.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..081a507
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-072.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-073.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-073.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ec49400
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-073.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-074.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-074.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6184274
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-074.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-075.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-075.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cef8456
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-075.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-081.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-081.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aad235b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-081.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-083.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-083.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7a13767
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-083.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-085.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-085.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b6b1d1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-085.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-086.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-086.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..177fd90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-086.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-087.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-087.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe4345c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-087.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-088.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-088.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fae0ebb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-088.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-090.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-090.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8cd49f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-090.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-091.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-091.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8d49e44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-091.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-092.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-092.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a58a4e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-092.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-093.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-093.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30a2092
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-093.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-094.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-094.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c5b93cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-094.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-097.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-097.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..da5f50a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-097.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-099.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-099.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d15179
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-099.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-101.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-101.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..545d5da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-101.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-102.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-102.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b96f1a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-102.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-104.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-104.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b7bf3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-104.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-105.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-105.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d34c1ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-105.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-107.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-107.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9d8afe4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-107.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-109.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-109.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db644a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-109.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-110.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-110.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f68fa61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-110.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-111.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-111.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..63a950b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-111.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-113.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-113.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3d3f08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-113.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-114.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-114.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cba9887
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-114.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-116.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-116.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..832bb03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-116.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-117.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-117.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4c1211d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-117.jpg
diff --git a/23770-h/images/i-118.jpg b/23770-h/images/i-118.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3c8a8ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-h/images/i-118.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/f001.png b/23770-page-images/f001.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..43b8344
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/f001.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/f002.png b/23770-page-images/f002.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..83d7cb6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/f002.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/f003.png b/23770-page-images/f003.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9bc08d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/f003.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p005-image.jpg b/23770-page-images/p005-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9b3f655
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p005-image.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p005.png b/23770-page-images/p005.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..053b8bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p005.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p006.png b/23770-page-images/p006.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8afe244
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p006.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p007.png b/23770-page-images/p007.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..233246f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p007.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p008.png b/23770-page-images/p008.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e557d33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p008.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p009.jpg b/23770-page-images/p009.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8ab2b47
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p009.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p010.png b/23770-page-images/p010.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..edc457d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p010.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p011-image.png b/23770-page-images/p011-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b001cab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p011-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p011.png b/23770-page-images/p011.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..389b8bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p011.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p012.png b/23770-page-images/p012.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8344506
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p012.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p013.png b/23770-page-images/p013.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3d14310
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p013.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p014.png b/23770-page-images/p014.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a82a9e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p014.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p015.png b/23770-page-images/p015.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..911fad1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p015.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p016-image.jpg b/23770-page-images/p016-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5f86ca8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p016-image.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p016.png b/23770-page-images/p016.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bdc3a09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p016.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p017.png b/23770-page-images/p017.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b3e3483
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p017.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p018-image.png b/23770-page-images/p018-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1c6579a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p018-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p018.png b/23770-page-images/p018.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45f05d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p018.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p019.png b/23770-page-images/p019.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0fbbb4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p019.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p020-image.jpg b/23770-page-images/p020-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0793d66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p020-image.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p020.png b/23770-page-images/p020.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..39b3d8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p020.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p021.png b/23770-page-images/p021.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72927f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p021.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p022.png b/23770-page-images/p022.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..88a39d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p022.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p023.jpg b/23770-page-images/p023.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b4fd691
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p023.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p024.png b/23770-page-images/p024.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7a6849d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p024.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p025.png b/23770-page-images/p025.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4159800
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p025.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p026.png b/23770-page-images/p026.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cca38dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p026.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p027-image.jpg b/23770-page-images/p027-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9688478
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p027-image.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p027.png b/23770-page-images/p027.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..91ec067
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p027.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p028-image.png b/23770-page-images/p028-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4ad9737
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p028-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p028.png b/23770-page-images/p028.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b53be5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p028.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p029-image.jpg b/23770-page-images/p029-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3127292
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p029-image.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p029.png b/23770-page-images/p029.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..39ebedf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p029.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p030.png b/23770-page-images/p030.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0e061f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p030.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p031.png b/23770-page-images/p031.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ca118a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p031.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p032.png b/23770-page-images/p032.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ab4bedc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p032.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p033.png b/23770-page-images/p033.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a925eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p033.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p034.png b/23770-page-images/p034.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc553e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p034.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p035.png b/23770-page-images/p035.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c06083f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p035.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p035a-image.jpg b/23770-page-images/p035a-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..95ad9fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p035a-image.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p035b-image.png b/23770-page-images/p035b-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d0009e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p035b-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p036.png b/23770-page-images/p036.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..93fe25f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p036.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p037.jpg b/23770-page-images/p037.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2cb016d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p037.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p038.png b/23770-page-images/p038.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac1fee5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p038.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p039.png b/23770-page-images/p039.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..651bdce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p039.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p040.png b/23770-page-images/p040.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5fdac52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p040.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p041.png b/23770-page-images/p041.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b63641c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p041.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p042.png b/23770-page-images/p042.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..769df24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p042.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p043.jpg b/23770-page-images/p043.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0cf77c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p043.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p044.png b/23770-page-images/p044.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ab88174
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p044.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p045-image.png b/23770-page-images/p045-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..698b2ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p045-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p045.png b/23770-page-images/p045.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..22ed4d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p045.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p046.png b/23770-page-images/p046.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f1076f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p046.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p047-image.jpg b/23770-page-images/p047-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc24962
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p047-image.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p047.png b/23770-page-images/p047.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7e25a71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p047.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p048-image.png b/23770-page-images/p048-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..21bf70e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p048-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p048.png b/23770-page-images/p048.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0f191ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p048.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p049-image.png b/23770-page-images/p049-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3439872
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p049-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p049.png b/23770-page-images/p049.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf3e5a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p049.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p050-image.png b/23770-page-images/p050-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d525b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p050-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p050.png b/23770-page-images/p050.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3ff6097
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p050.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p051.png b/23770-page-images/p051.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f3e5d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p051.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p052.jpg b/23770-page-images/p052.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e9b4584
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p052.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p053.jpg b/23770-page-images/p053.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f8fc00e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p053.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p054.png b/23770-page-images/p054.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e4807a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p054.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p055.png b/23770-page-images/p055.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c7852c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p055.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p056-image.png b/23770-page-images/p056-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b89fc77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p056-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p056.png b/23770-page-images/p056.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d4d443
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p056.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p057-image.jpg b/23770-page-images/p057-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d179e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p057-image.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p057.png b/23770-page-images/p057.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3ca36ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p057.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p058-image.png b/23770-page-images/p058-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..66db36b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p058-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p058.png b/23770-page-images/p058.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d08d4cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p058.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p059-image.png b/23770-page-images/p059-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..09f3ef2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p059-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p059.png b/23770-page-images/p059.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ce72359
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p059.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p060.png b/23770-page-images/p060.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..03beaeb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p060.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p061-image.jpg b/23770-page-images/p061-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ea85ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p061-image.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p061.png b/23770-page-images/p061.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a7d74a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p061.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p062.png b/23770-page-images/p062.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b63f4e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p062.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p063.png b/23770-page-images/p063.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..26dcd7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p063.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p064-image.png b/23770-page-images/p064-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db8d1bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p064-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p064.png b/23770-page-images/p064.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2420191
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p064.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p065.png b/23770-page-images/p065.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..26e3088
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p065.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p066-image.png b/23770-page-images/p066-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..081c0dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p066-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p066.png b/23770-page-images/p066.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..131f6a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p066.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p067-image.jpg b/23770-page-images/p067-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..56eac67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p067-image.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p067.png b/23770-page-images/p067.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2a86ca1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p067.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p068.png b/23770-page-images/p068.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c22ccf5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p068.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p069-image.png b/23770-page-images/p069-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d80e54f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p069-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p069.png b/23770-page-images/p069.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db51ec5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p069.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p070.png b/23770-page-images/p070.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..85ecf21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p070.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p071.jpg b/23770-page-images/p071.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..49f3708
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p071.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p072.png b/23770-page-images/p072.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d96025b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p072.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p073-image.png b/23770-page-images/p073-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..413237e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p073-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p073.png b/23770-page-images/p073.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d0ede83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p073.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p074-image.png b/23770-page-images/p074-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3edfe2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p074-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p074.png b/23770-page-images/p074.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eb96273
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p074.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p075-image.png b/23770-page-images/p075-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..443a962
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p075-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p075.png b/23770-page-images/p075.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f60ce7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p075.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p076.png b/23770-page-images/p076.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..07d695f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p076.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p077.png b/23770-page-images/p077.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d3406c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p077.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p078.png b/23770-page-images/p078.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c4a4f79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p078.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p079.png b/23770-page-images/p079.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba8f84c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p079.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p080.png b/23770-page-images/p080.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cdaf0af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p080.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p081.jpg b/23770-page-images/p081.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..927a409
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p081.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p082.png b/23770-page-images/p082.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ccaa563
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p082.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p083.jpg b/23770-page-images/p083.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..83dc7ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p083.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p084.png b/23770-page-images/p084.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5fb7a57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p084.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p085.jpg b/23770-page-images/p085.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6cb859f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p085.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p086.jpg b/23770-page-images/p086.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..89ad3b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p086.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p087-image.jpg b/23770-page-images/p087-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..746738f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p087-image.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p087.png b/23770-page-images/p087.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c3dc0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p087.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p088-image.png b/23770-page-images/p088-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef36ef2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p088-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p088.png b/23770-page-images/p088.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5a33123
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p088.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p089.png b/23770-page-images/p089.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa64039
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p089.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p090-image.png b/23770-page-images/p090-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3c8c1c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p090-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p090.png b/23770-page-images/p090.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..93b0a1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p090.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p091.jpg b/23770-page-images/p091.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6bd1bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p091.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p092-image.png b/23770-page-images/p092-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2dbfefc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p092-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p092.png b/23770-page-images/p092.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..29f53d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p092.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p093-image.jpg b/23770-page-images/p093-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f30dde1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p093-image.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p093.png b/23770-page-images/p093.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..39d16e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p093.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p094.png b/23770-page-images/p094.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b487e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p094.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p095.png b/23770-page-images/p095.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..93d64ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p095.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p096.png b/23770-page-images/p096.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8ea3e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p096.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p097.jpg b/23770-page-images/p097.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5da7e2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p097.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p098.png b/23770-page-images/p098.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b8c0495
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p098.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p099-image.png b/23770-page-images/p099-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..140a921
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p099-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p099.png b/23770-page-images/p099.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..435eb4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p099.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p100.png b/23770-page-images/p100.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f6058e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p100.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p101.jpg b/23770-page-images/p101.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf95d90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p101.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p102-image.png b/23770-page-images/p102-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0cb12fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p102-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p102.png b/23770-page-images/p102.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..69a4ca6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p102.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p103.png b/23770-page-images/p103.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..80c7c3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p103.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p104-image.png b/23770-page-images/p104-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4f3d538
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p104-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p104.png b/23770-page-images/p104.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6ebe43c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p104.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p105-image.jpg b/23770-page-images/p105-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..106369c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p105-image.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p105.png b/23770-page-images/p105.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..be27d25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p105.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p106.png b/23770-page-images/p106.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..af2d9f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p106.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p107-image.jpg b/23770-page-images/p107-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c652d5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p107-image.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p107.png b/23770-page-images/p107.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1b9fdd4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p107.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p108.png b/23770-page-images/p108.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8e1cd59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p108.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p109-image.png b/23770-page-images/p109-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ebc489
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p109-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p109.png b/23770-page-images/p109.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ea289f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p109.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p110-image.png b/23770-page-images/p110-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca3370f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p110-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p110.png b/23770-page-images/p110.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..623911f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p110.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p111-image.jpg b/23770-page-images/p111-image.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c84c341
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p111-image.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p111.png b/23770-page-images/p111.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3c6dcce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p111.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p112.png b/23770-page-images/p112.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ad94b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p112.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p113.jpg b/23770-page-images/p113.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2a98f83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p113.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p114-image.png b/23770-page-images/p114-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c084d63
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p114-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p114.png b/23770-page-images/p114.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8396593
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p114.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p115.png b/23770-page-images/p115.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf0356d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p115.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p116.png b/23770-page-images/p116.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..49f1ce2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p116.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p117.jpg b/23770-page-images/p117.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..48b9b08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p117.jpg
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p118-image.png b/23770-page-images/p118-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0208c02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p118-image.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p118.png b/23770-page-images/p118.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..837b7b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p118.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p119.png b/23770-page-images/p119.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..174374f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p119.png
diff --git a/23770-page-images/p120.png b/23770-page-images/p120.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..430cca9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770-page-images/p120.png
diff --git a/23770.txt b/23770.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d0daa8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2786 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Mission Furniture, by H. H. Windsor
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Mission Furniture
+       How to Make It, Part I
+
+Author: H. H. Windsor
+
+Release Date: December 8, 2007 [EBook #23770]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MISSION FURNITURE ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by K. Nordquist, Ross Wilburn and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MISSION FURNITURE
+
+HOW TO MAKE IT
+
+PART I
+
+
+POPULAR MECHANICS HANDBOOKS
+
+
+CHICAGO
+
+
+POPULAR MECHANICS CO.
+
+
+
+Copyrighted, 1909,
+by H.H. WINDSOR
+
+
+This book is one of the series of Handbooks on industrial subjects being
+published by the Popular Mechanics Company.
+
+Like Popular Mechanics Magazine, and like the other books in this
+series, it is "written so you can understand it."
+
+The purpose of Popular Mechanics Handbooks is to supply a growing demand
+for high-class, up-to-date and accurate text-books, suitable for home
+study as well as for class use, on all mechanical subjects.
+
+The text and illustrations, in each instance, have been prepared
+expressly for this series by well known experts, and revised by the
+editor of Popular Mechanics.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+HOME-MADE MISSION CHAIR,    5
+
+HOW TO MAKE A LAMP STAND,   8
+
+HOW TO MAKE A PORCH CHAIR,   15
+
+HOW TO MAKE A TABOURET,   17
+
+HOW TO MAKE A MORRIS CHAIR,   22
+
+HOME-MADE MISSION BOOK RACK,   27
+
+HOW TO MAKE A MISSION LIBRARY,   29
+
+HOME-MADE MISSION CANDLESTICK,   35
+
+ANOTHER STYLE OF MISSION CHAIR,   36
+
+HOW TO MAKE AND FINISH A MAGAZINE STAND,   42
+
+HOME-MADE LAWN SWING,   47
+
+HOW TO MAKE A PORTABLE TABLE,   50
+
+HOW TO MAKE A COMBINATION BILLIARD TABLE AND DAVENPORT,   51
+
+EASILY MADE BOOK SHELVES,   56
+
+A BLACKING CASE TABOURET,   57
+
+HOW TO MAKE A ROLL TOP DESK,   62
+
+HOW TO MAKE A ROMAN CHAIR,   67
+
+HOW TO MAKE A SETTEE,   70
+
+HOW TO MAKE A PYROGRAPHER'S TABLE,   74
+
+MISSION STAINS,   76
+
+FILLING OAK,   77
+
+WAX FINISHING,   78
+
+FUMING OF OAK,   78
+
+HOW TO MAKE BLACK WAX,   79
+
+THE 40 STYLES OF CHAIRS,   80
+
+HOW TO MAKE A PIANO BENCH,   87
+
+HOW TO MAKE A MISSION SHAVING STAND,  89
+
+A MISSION WASTE-PAPER BASKET,   93
+
+A CELLARETTE PEDESTAL,   96
+
+A DRESSER,   100
+
+A MISSION SIDEBOARD,   103
+
+A HALL OR WINDOW SEAT,   107
+
+A MISSION PLANT STAND,   109
+
+A BEDSIDE MEDICINE STAND,   112
+
+A MISSION HALL CHAIR,   115
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+  Suitable for Dining Room Use, 5
+  Details of Chair Construction, 6
+  The Completed Lamp, 9 Construction of Shade, 11
+  Details of Construction of Library Lamp Stand, 12
+  Details of Home-Made Porch Seat, 14
+  Porch Chair Finished, 16 Details of Tabouret, 18
+  Tabouret as Completed, 20
+  Complete Morris Chair Without Cushion, 23
+  Details of a Morris Chair, 24
+  Light but Strong, 27
+  Details of Stand, 28
+  This Picture is from a Photograph of the Mission Table Described in
+    This Article, 29
+  Showing Dimensions of Table, 30
+  Details of Table Construction, 32
+  Candlestick, 35
+  Details of Candlestick, 35
+  Mission Chair Complete, 37
+  Details of Mission Chair Construction, 39
+  Completed Stand, 43
+  Details of the Magazine Stand, 45
+  The Completed Swing, 47
+  Details of Seat, 48
+  Showing Construction of Stand, 49
+  Table for Outdoor Use, 50
+  By Swinging the Top Back the Table is Transformed into the Elegant
+    Davenport Seen on the Opposite Page, 52
+  The Billiard Table as Converted into a Luxurious Davenport--A Child
+    Can Make the Change in a Moment, 53
+  Details Showing Dimensions of Parts, 54
+  Details of Shoe Rest, 56
+  Details of Tabouret Construction, 57
+  The Desk Complete, 58
+  Details of Tabouret Construction, 59
+  The Desk Complete, 61
+  Rolltop Details, 62
+  Details, 64
+  Detail of Pigeonholes, 66
+  The Roman Chair, 67
+  Details of Parts of Chair, 69
+  A Complete Two-Cushion Settee, 71
+  Details of a Mission Settee, 72
+  Details of the Cushion, 73
+  Convenient Pyrographer's Table, 74
+  Storage for Apparatus, 75
+  Chairs 1, 81
+  Chairs 2, 83
+  Chairs 3, 85
+  Chairs 4, 86
+  Piano Bench, 87
+  Piano Bench Details, 88
+  Shaving Stand Details, 90
+  Shaving Stand Complete, 91
+  Mirror Frame and Standards Details, 92
+  Waste-Paper Basket to Match Library Table, 93
+  Detail of Waste-Paper Basket, 94
+  Plain-Oak Cellarette Pedestal, 97
+  Detail of Cellarette Pedestal, 99
+  Dresser in Quarter-Sawed Oak, 101
+  Detail of the Dresser, 102
+  Detail of the Mission Sideboard, 104
+  Mission Sideboard in Quarter-Sawed Oak, 105
+  Seat Made of Quarter-Sawed Oak, 107
+  Detail of the Hall or Window Seat, 109
+  Detail of the Plant Stand, 110
+  Complete Plant Stand, 111
+  Medicine Stand in Quarter-Sawed Oak, 113
+  Detail of the Medicine Stand, 114
+  Detail of the Hall Chair, 116
+  Complete Hall Chair in Plain Oak, 117
+
+
+
+
+HOME-MADE MISSION CHAIR
+
+
+[Illustration: Suitable for Dining Room Use]
+
+[Illustration: Details of Chair Construction]
+
+A mission chair suitable for the dining room can be made from any one of
+the furniture woods to match the other articles of furniture. The
+materials can be secured from the planing mill dressed and sandpapered
+ready to cut the tenons and mortises. The material list can be made up
+from the dimensions given in the detail drawing. The front legs or
+posts, as well as the back ones, are made from 1-3/4-in. square stock,
+the back ones having a slope of 2 in. from the seat to the top. All the
+slats are made from 7/8-in. material and of such widths as are shown in
+the detail. The three upright slats in the back are 3/4-in. material.
+The detail drawing shows the side and back, the front being the same as
+the back from the seat down. All joints are mortised in the posts, as
+shown. The joints, however, can be made with dowels if desired. If
+making dowel joints they must be clamped very tight when glued and put
+together. The seat can be made from one piece of 7/8-in. material,
+fitted with notches around the posts. This is then upholstered with
+leather without using springs. Leather must be selected as to color to
+suit the kind of wood used in making the chair. The seat can also be
+made with an open center for a cane bottom by making a square of four
+pieces of 7/8-in. material about 4 in. wide. These pieces are fitted
+neatly to the proper size and dowelled firmly together. After the cane
+is put in the opening the cane is covered over and upholstered with
+leather in the same manner as with a solid bottom.
+
+
+
+
+HOW TO MAKE A LAMP STAND AND SHADE
+
+
+A library light stand of pleasing design and easy construction is made
+as follows: Square up a piece of white oak so that it shall have a width
+and thickness of 1-3/4 in. with a length of 13 in. Square up two pieces
+of the same kind of material to the same width and thickness, but with a
+length of 12 in. each. Square up two pieces to a width and length of 3
+in. each with a thickness of 1-1/8 in.
+
+If a planing mill is near, time and patience will be saved by ordering
+one piece 1-3/4 in. square and 40 in. long, two pieces 1-1/8 in. thick
+and 3 in. square, all planed and sandpapered on all surfaces. The long
+piece can then be cut at home to the lengths specified above.
+
+The 13-in. piece is for the upright and should have a 1/2-in. hole bored
+the full length through the center. If the bit is not long enough to
+reach entirely through, bore from each end, then use a red-hot iron to
+finish. This hole is for the electric wire or gas pipe if gas is used.
+
+The two pieces for the base are alike except the groove of one is cut
+from the top and of the other from the under side, as shown. Shape the
+under sides first. This can best be done by placing the two pieces in a
+vise, under sides together, and boring two holes with a 1-in. bit. The
+center of each hole will be 2-1/2 in. from either end and in the crack
+between the pieces. The pieces can then be taken out, lines gauged on
+each side of each, and the wood between the holes removed with turning
+saw and scraper steel.
+
+[Illustration: The Completed Lamp]
+
+The width of the grooves must be determined by laying one piece upon the
+other; a try-square should be used to square the lines across the
+pieces; however, gauge for depth, gauging both pieces from their top
+surfaces. Chisel out the grooves and round off the corners as shown in
+the sketch, using a 3/4-in. radius.
+
+These parts may be put together and fastened to the upright by means of
+two long screws from the under side, placed to either side of the
+1/2-in. hole. This hole must be continued through the pieces forming the
+base.
+
+The braces are easiest made by taking the two pieces which were planed
+to 1-1/8 in. thick and 3 in. square and drawing a diagonal on each. Find
+the middle of this diagonal by drawing the central portion of the other
+diagonal; at this point place the spur of the bit and bore a 1-in. hole
+in each block.
+
+Saw the two blocks apart, sawing along a diagonal of each. Plane the
+surfaces on the saw cut smooth and sandpaper the curve made by the bit.
+Fasten the braces in place by means of roundhead blued screws.
+
+To make a shade such as is shown in the illustration is rather
+difficult. The shade is made of wood glued up and has art glass fitted
+in rabbets cut on the inner edges. Such shades can be purchased ready to
+attach. The sketch shows one method of attaching. Four small pieces of
+strap iron are bent to the shape shown and fastened to the four sides of
+the upright. Electric globes--two, three or four may be attached as
+shown.
+
+[Illustration: Construction of Shade]
+
+The kind of wood finish for the stand will depend upon the finish on the
+wooden shade, if shade is purchased. Brown Flemish is obtained by first
+staining the wood with Flemish water stain diluted by the addition of
+two parts water to one part stain. When this is dry, sandpaper the
+"whiskers" which were raised by the water and fill with a medium dark
+filler. Directions will be found on the filler cans. When filler has
+hardened, apply two coats of wax.
+
+[Illustration: Details of Construction of Library Lamp Stand]
+
+The metal shade as shown in the sketch is a "layout" for a copper or
+brass shade of a size suitable for this particular lamp. Such shades are
+frequently made from one piece of sheet metal and designs are pierced in
+them as suggested in the "layout." This piercing is done by driving the
+point of a nail through the metal from the under side before the parts
+are soldered or riveted together. If the parts are to be riveted, enough
+additional metal must be left on the last panel to allow for a lap. No
+lap is needed when joints are soldered.
+
+A better way, and one which will permit the use of heavier metal, is to
+cut each side of the shade separately and fasten them together by
+riveting a piece of metal over each joint. The shape of this piece can
+be made so as to accentuate the rivet heads and thus give a pleasing
+effect.
+
+For art-glass the metal panels are cut out, the glass is inserted from
+the under side and held in place by small clips soldered to the frame of
+the shade.
+
+Pleasing effects are obtained by using one kind of metal, as brass, and
+reinforcing and riveting with another metal, such as copper.
+
+[Illustration: Details of Home-Made Porch Seat]
+
+
+
+
+HOW TO MAKE A PORCH CHAIR
+
+
+The illustration shows a very comfortable and attractive porch chair
+that can be made with few tools and easily procured material. Most any
+kind of wood will answer, says the American Carpenter and Builder, but
+if open grained wood, such as oak or chestnut, is used, the parts should
+be filled with a paste filler. If the natural color of the wood is not
+desired, the wood may first be stained, the filler being colored
+somewhat darker than the stain.
+
+Procure enough lumber to make all the pieces shown in the detail drawing
+and finish to the dimensions shown, being careful to make the
+corresponding pieces exactly alike in order to preserve the perfect
+symmetry which is necessary in work of this kind. In boring the holes
+care must be taken to keep both edges of the holes sharp and clean. The
+holes should each be bored until the spur shows; the bit should then be
+withdrawn and the rest of the boring be done from the other side. The
+semicircular notches are made by placing the two pieces edge to edge in
+the vise and placing the spur of the bit in the crack. The 1-in. bit is
+used. As it will be difficult to finish the boring of these blocks from
+the second side, the parts remaining may be cut out with the knife after
+the pieces have been separated.
+
+Five 1/2-in. dowel rods are needed. It is possible to get these in one
+long piece if you happen to live near a mill and then all you will have
+to do is to saw off the desired lengths. However, if they cannot be got
+easily you can make your own. Two rods each 18-1/4 in. long; two rods
+each 20-1/4 in. and one rod 22-1/4 in. give the exact lengths. It is
+well to cut each piece a little longer than required so that the ends
+which are imperfectly formed may be cut off. These rods should fit tight
+and may be fastened in addition with a small screw or nail from the
+under or back side.
+
+[Illustration: Porch Chair Finished]
+
+The hand rests should be nailed to the arms with small nails or brads
+before the arms are bolted. The illustration of the assembled chair
+shows the relative position.
+
+The bolts should be 1/4 in. and of the following lengths: 4 bolts 2-1/4
+in. long; 2 bolts 2 in. long; 2 bolts 3 in. long. Washers should be
+placed between adjacent pieces of wood fastened together with bolts and
+also at both ends of the bolts. This will require 26 washers in all.
+While the size of the chair may be varied, it will be necessary to keep
+the proportions if the parts are to fold properly.
+
+
+
+
+HOW TO MAKE A TABOURET
+
+
+Secure from the planing mill the following pieces and have them planed
+and sandpapered on two surfaces: For the top, one piece 7/8 in. thick
+and 17 in. square. For the legs, four pieces 7/8 in. thick, 4-3/4 in.
+wide and 18-1/2 in. long. For the lower stretchers, two pieces 7/8 in.
+thick, 2-3/4 in. wide and 15-3/4 in. long. For the top stretchers, two
+pieces 7/8 in. thick, 2-1/4 in. wide and 13-1/4 in. long. No stock need
+be ordered for the keys, as they can be made out of the waste pieces
+remaining after the legs are shaped.
+
+Begin work on the four legs first. While both sides of each leg slope,
+it will be necessary to plane a joint edge on each leg from which to lay
+out the mortises, grooves and to test the ends. It will be necessary to
+have a bevel square to use in marking off the slopes and for testing
+them. To get the setting for the bevel square, make a full sized "lay
+out" or drawing of the necessary lines in their proper relation to one
+another and adjust the bevel to those lines.
+
+From the joint edge lay out the mortises, grooves and the slopes of
+sides and ends of the legs. Cut the mortises and grooves first, then
+shape up the sides. Saw the sides accurately and quite close to the
+lines, finishing with the steel cabinet scraper.
+
+[Illustration: Details of Tabouret]
+
+Next make the bottom stretchers. In laying out the cross lap joint, the
+working faces are both to be up when the joint is completed, therefore
+lay off one groove on the face of one piece and on the side opposite the
+face on the other. In gauging for depth, however, be careful to keep the
+gauge block against the working face of each piece.
+
+In laying out the mortises for the keys, the opening on the top surface
+is to be made 1/8 in. longer than on the under surface. The slope of
+the key will therefore be 1/8 in. of slope to each 7/8 in. of length.
+The drawing shows the mortise as 7/8 in. from the shoulders of the
+tenon. This distance is the same as the thickness of the leg and to
+insure the key's pulling the shoulder up against the leg firmly, should
+any of the legs happen to be a little less than 7/8 in., it is well to
+make the mortise slightly nearer the shoulder than 7/8 in.
+
+It is a good plan to lay out the mortise in the tenon at the same time
+the shoulders of the tenons are laid out. Otherwise the joint edge being
+cut off in making the tenon there is no convenient way to locate this
+mortise accurately.
+
+Lay off the top stretchers according to the dimensions shown in the
+drawing. Observe the same precautions about the cross lap joint as were
+given for the lower stretchers, except that the joint edges are to be
+placed up in this latter case. Make sure the grooves are laid out in the
+middle before cutting. As a test, place the pieces side by side, examine
+the markings, then turn one of them end for end and again examine.
+
+The grooves into which the legs pass are 1/8 in. deep and must be very
+carefully cut. Their purpose is to give rigidity to the tabouret frame.
+Bore two holes in each stretcher for the screws that are to fasten the
+top in place.
+
+Make the keys, scrape all the parts and sandpaper those that were not so
+treated at the mill. Use glue to fasten the tops of the legs to the top
+stretchers and assemble these parts.
+
+The top is octagonal or eight-sided. To make it, square up a piece to
+16-1/2 by 16-1/2 in. Measure the diagonal, take one-half of it and
+measure from each corner of the board each way along the edges to locate
+the places at which to cut off the corners. Connect these points, saw
+and plane the remaining four sides. There is to be a 5/8-in. bevel on
+the under side of the top. Scrape and sandpaper these edges and secure
+the top to the stretchers with screws.
+
+[Illustration: Tabouret as Completed]
+
+Much time can be saved and a better result obtained if the wood
+finishing is done before the parts are put together. Especially is this
+true if stain and filler are used.
+
+A very pretty finish and one easily put on even after the parts are put
+together is obtained as follows: Take a barrel and stuff up the cracks
+or paste paper over them so as to make it as near airtight as possible.
+In some out-of-the-way place put a dish with about 2 oz. of strong
+ammonia. Set the tabouret over this dish and quickly invert the barrel
+over the tabouret. Allow the fumes to act on the wood for at least 15
+hours. Remove the barrel and allow the fumes to escape. Polish with
+several coats of wax such as is used upon floors. Directions for waxing
+will be found on the cans that contain the wax.. This produces the rich
+nut-brown finish so popular in Arts and Crafts furniture and is known as
+fumed oak.
+
+
+
+
+HOW TO MAKE A MORRIS CHAIR
+
+
+The stock necessary to make a morris chair of craftsman design as shown
+in the engraving can be purchased mill-planed and sandpapered on four
+sides as given in the following list:
+
+  4 posts 1-3/4 by 3 by 26 in.
+  2 front and back rails 7/8 by 5-1/2 by 24 in.
+  2 side rails 7/8 by 5-1/2 by 28 in.
+  2 arm pieces 7/8 by 5-1/2 by 37 in.
+  7 slats 3/8 by 2 by 24 in.
+  2 cleats 1 by 1 by 22-1/2 in.
+  2 back stiles 1 by 2-1/2 by 24-1/2 in.
+  2 back rails 1 by 2 by 17 in.
+  3 back slats 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 19 in.
+  1 back support 3/4 by 3/4 by 24 in.
+  2 support rests 1 by 1-1/2 by 8-1/2 in.
+  2 dowels 1/2 in. diameter, 6 in. long.
+
+First make and put together the sides of the chair. While the glue is
+setting on these parts make and assemble the back. The front and back
+rails may next be made and placed and the cleats and bottom slats
+fastened. With the adjustment of the back the chair is ready for the
+finish.
+
+The posts are to be tenoned on the upper ends. These tenons are to
+project 3/16 in. above the arm and should be slightly beveled. The lower
+ends of the posts, likewise, all other projecting ends, should be
+beveled to avoid their splintering. All sharp corners, as on the arms,
+should be sandpapered just enough to take their sharpness off, so as not
+to injure the hand.
+
+That the chair may be properly inclined, the rear posts are cut 1 in.
+shorter than the forward ones. To get the correct slant on the bottoms
+of these posts, lay a straightedge so that its edge touches the bottom
+of the front post at its front surface, but keep it 1 in. above the
+bottom of the rear post. Mark with pencil along the straightedge across
+both posts.
+
+[Illustration: Complete Morris Chair Without Cushion]
+
+[Illustration: Details of a Morris Chair]
+
+At the rear ends of the arms are the notched pieces that allow the back
+to be adjusted to different angles. These pieces may be fastened in
+place either by means of roundhead screws from above or flatheads from
+underneath the arms. The notches are to be cut 3/4 in. deep. If more
+than three adjustments are wanted, the arms must be made correspondingly
+longer.
+
+The dimensions for the tenons on all the larger pieces will be found on
+the drawing. For the back, the tenons of the cross pieces, the rails,
+should be 3/8 by 1-1/4-in. For the slats, the easiest way is to not
+tenon them but to "let in" the whole end, making the mortises in the
+rails 3/8 by 1-1/2 in. This will necessitate cutting the sides of the
+mortises very accurately, but this extra care will be more than
+compensated by not having to bother with the cutting of tenons on each
+end of the three back slats.
+
+To finish the chair, put on a coat of water stain, first removing all
+surplus glue and thoroughly scraping and sandpapering all the parts that
+were not so treated at the mill. The color of the stain will depend upon
+the finish desired, whether golden, mission, etc. Water stains cause the
+grain of the wood to roughen, so it will be necessary to resandpaper the
+surfaces after the stain has dried, using fine paper. Next apply a coat
+of filler colored to match the stain. Directions for its application
+will be found upon the cans in which the filler comes. After the filler
+has hardened put on a very thin coat of shellac.
+
+What step is taken next will depend upon what kind of a surface is
+desired. Several coats of polishing wax may be put on. This is easily
+done--directions will be found on the cans--and makes the most
+satisfactory finish for mission and craftsman furniture. It is the
+easiest to apply. Several coats of shellac or of varnish might be put on
+instead of wax. Each coat of the shellac should be rubbed when
+thoroughly dried with curled hair or fine steel wool or fine oiled
+sandpaper. Rub the first coats of varnish with hair-cloth or curled hair
+and the last coats with pulverized pumice stone and crude oil or raw
+linseed oil.
+
+Cushions for the chair can be made at home. They may be made of art
+leather such as Spanish roan skin and the top and bottom parts fastened
+together by lacing leather thongs through holes previously punched along
+the edges of the parts. A very pretty effect is obtained by using thongs
+of a different but harmonious color. The manner of lacing may be any one
+of the various laces such as are used in lacing belts or as shoestrings.
+These cushions may be filled with hair or cotton felt. Denim or burlap
+may also be used as a covering and are much less expensive than the
+leather. Lace one side and the two ends, then place filling and finish
+lacing.
+
+Art leather cushions retail at from $16 to $20 a pair and the denim and
+burlap at $6 to $9.
+
+The bottom cushion should be made the full size of the chair. The front
+and back rails extend a little above the slats and thus hold it in
+place. The back cushion will settle down a little and therefore may be
+made nearly the full length from the slats to the top of the back.
+
+
+
+
+HOME-MADE MISSION BOOK RACK
+
+
+[Illustration: Light but Strong]
+
+When making the book rack as shown in the accompanying photograph use
+quarter-sawed oak if possible, as this wood is the most suitable for
+finishing in the different mission stains. This piece of furniture is
+very attractive and simple to construct. The upper shelf can be used
+for vases or a plant of some kind, while the lower shelves afford ample
+room for books and magazines.
+
+The slats and legs are fastened to the shelves with 2-in. round-headed
+brass screws. These can be purchased from any hardware store. One screw
+is used at each joint of a slat and shelf which calls for 32 screws in
+all. Holes should be bored into the slats and legs in which to insert
+the screws. This will keep the wood from splitting. The dimensions are
+given in the diagram sketch, although these may be changed to suit the
+requirement of the builder. If no glue is used on the joints when
+setting up, the rack can easily be taken apart and put in a small bundle
+for moving.
+
+[Illustration: Details of Stand]
+
+
+
+
+HOW TO MAKE A MISSION LIBRARY TABLE
+
+
+The mission library table, the drawings for which are here given, has
+been found well proportioned and of pleasing appearance. It can be made
+of any of the several furniture woods in common use, such as selected,
+quarter-sawed white oak which will be found exceptionally pleasing in
+the effect produced.
+
+[Illustration: This Picture is from a Photograph of the Mission Table
+Described in This Article]
+
+If a planing mill is at hand the stock can be ordered in such a way as
+to avoid the hard work of planing and sandpapering. Of course if
+mill-planed stock cannot be had, the following dimensions must be
+enlarged slightly to allow for "squaring up the rough."
+
+[Illustration: Showing Dimensions of Table]
+
+For the top, order 1 piece 1-1/8 in. thick, 34 in. wide and 46 in. long.
+Have it S-4-S (surface on four sides) and "squared" to length. Also
+specify that it be sandpapered on the top surface, the edges and ends.
+
+For the shelf, order 1 piece 7/8 in. thick, 22 in. wide and 42 in. long,
+with the four sides surfaced, squared and sandpapered the same as for
+the top.
+
+For the side rails, order 2 pieces 7/8 in. thick, 6 in. wide and 37 in.
+long, S-4-S and sanded on one side. For the end rails, 2 pieces 7/8 in.
+thick, 6 in. wide and 25 in. long. Other specifications as for the side
+rails.
+
+For the stretchers, into which the shelf tenons enter, 2 pieces 1-1/8
+in. thick, 3-3/4 in. wide and 25 in. long, surfaced and sanded on four
+sides. For the slats, 10 pieces 5/8 in. thick, 1-1/2 in. wide and 17 in.
+long, surfaced and sanded on four sides. For the keys, 4 pieces 3/4 in.
+thick, 1-1/4 in. wide and 2-7/8 in. long, S-4-S. This width is a little
+wide; it will allow the key to be shaped as desired.
+
+The drawings obviate any necessity for going into detail in the
+description. Fig. 1 gives an assembly drawing showing the relation of
+the parts. Fig. 2 gives the detail of an end. The tenons for the side
+rails are laid off and the mortises placed in the post as are those on
+the end. Care must be taken, however, not to cut any mortises on the
+post below, as was done in cutting the stretcher mortises on the ends of
+the table. A good plan is to set the posts upright in the positions they
+are to occupy relative to one another and mark with pencil the
+approximate positions of the mortises. The legs can then be laid flat
+and the mortises accurately marked out with a fair degree of assurance
+that they will not be cut where they are not wanted and that the legs
+shall "pair" properly when effort is made to assemble the parts of the
+table.
+
+[Illustration: Details of Table Construction]
+
+The table ends should be glued up first and the glue allowed to harden,
+after which the tenons of the shelf may be inserted and the side rails
+placed.
+
+There is a reason for the shape, size and location of each tenon or
+mortise. For illustration, the shape of the tenon on the top rails
+permits the surface of the rail to extend almost flush with the surface
+of the post at the same time permitting the mortise in the post to be
+kept away from that surface. Again, the shape of the ends of the slats
+is such that, though they may vary slightly in length, the fitting of
+the joints will not be affected. Care must be taken in cutting the
+mortises to keep their sides clean and sharp and to size.
+
+In making the mortises for the keyed tenons, the length of mortise must
+be slightly in excess of the width of the tenon--about 1/8 in. of play
+to each side of each tenon. With a shelf of the width specified for this
+table, if such allowance is not made so that the tenons may move
+sideways, the shrinkage would split the shelf.
+
+In cutting across the ends of the shelf, between the tenons, leave a
+hole in the waste so that the turning saw or compass saw can be
+inserted. Saw within one-sixteenth of the line, after which this margin
+may be removed with chisel and mallet.
+
+In Fig. 3 is shown two views of the keyed tenon and the key. The mortise
+for the key is to be placed in the middle of the tenon. It will be noted
+that this mortise is laid out 1-1/16 in. from the shoulder of the tenon
+while the stretcher is 1-1/8 in. thick. This is to insure the key's
+pulling the shelf tightly against the side of the stretcher.
+
+Keys may be made in a variety of shapes. The one shown is simple and
+structurally good. Whatever shape is used, the important thing to keep
+in mind is that the size of the key and the slant of its forward surface
+where it passes through the tenon must be kept the same as the mortise
+made for it in the tenon.
+
+The top is to be fastened to the rails by means either of wooden
+buttons, Fig. 4, or small angle irons.
+
+There are a bewildering number of mission finishes upon the market. A
+very satisfactory one is obtained by applying a coat of brown Flemish
+water stain, diluted by the addition of water in the proportion of two
+parts water to 1 part stain. When this has dried, sand with No. 00
+paper, being careful not to "cut through." Next, apply a coat of dark
+brown filler; the directions for doing this will be found upon the can
+in which the filler is bought. One coat usually suffices. However, if an
+especially smooth surface is desired, a second coat may be applied in a
+similar manner.
+
+After the filler has hardened, a very thin coat of shellac is to be put
+on. When this has dried, it should be sanded lightly and then one or two
+coats of wax should be properly applied and polished. Directions for
+waxing are upon the cans in which the wax is bought. A beautiful dull
+gloss so much sought by finishers of modern furniture will be the result
+of carefully following these directions.
+
+
+
+
+HOME-MADE MISSION CANDLESTICK
+
+
+There are many kinds of mission candlesticks, but few of them carry out
+the mission design throughout. Herewith is illustrated a candlestick
+which may be made from the various woods that will have the style and
+lines of mission craft work. The base is made from 1-in. material, 4-1/2
+in. square. Two holes are bored and countersunk for screws to hold the
+post and handle. The post is 2-1/4 in. high, bored in one end to fit the
+size of a candle. The post is covered with a 3/8-in. thick cap, 2 in.
+square. This, also, is bored to fit the candle. The handle is 3/8 in.
+thick and 3 in. long with a 3/8-in. square mortise and is notched to fit
+the base. The wood may be selected to match any other piece of furniture
+and finished in any of the mission stains.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+[Illustration: Details of Candlestick]
+
+
+
+
+ANOTHER STYLE OF MISSION CHAIR
+
+
+The material necessary to make a mission chair as shown in the
+accompanying illustration may be secured from a planing mill with all
+four surfaces squared and sandpapered. The mill can do this work quickly
+and the expense will be nothing compared with the time it takes to do
+the work by hand.
+
+The following is the stock list:
+
+  4 legs, 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 by 32-1/2 in.
+  2 bottom end rails 7/8 by 5-3/4 by 23-1/2 in.
+  2 bottom side rails 7/8 by 5-3/4 by 28-1/2 in.
+  2 top end rails 7/8 by 4-1/2 by 23-1/2 in.
+  1 top back rail 7/8 by 4-1/2 by 28-1/2 in.
+  2 cleats 7/8 by 2-1/2 by 26-1/2 in.
+  7 slats 1/2 by 2 by 24 in.
+
+This design was purposely made simple. If it is considered too severe
+and the worker has had some experience in woodwork, it can easily be
+modified by adding vertical slats in back and sides. These should be
+made of 1/2-in. stock and their ends should be "let into" the rails by
+means of mortises.
+
+Either plain red oak or quarter-sawed white oak will do. Begin by
+squaring up one end of each leg, marking and cutting them to length and
+planing up the second ends so that they shall be square. Both the top
+and bottom of each leg should be beveled or rounded off about 1/4 in. so
+that they may not splinter or cause injury to the hand.
+
+When all of the legs have been made of the same length, set them on end
+in the positions they are to have relative to one another and mark with
+pencil the approximate locations of the mortises. Next, place them on
+the bench, side by side, even the ends and square sharp lines across
+to indicate the ends of the mortises. The drawing shows the dimensions
+to use. A sharp pencil should be used for this marking and the lines
+should be carried entirely across the two faces of each piece.
+
+[Illustration: Mission Chair Complete]
+
+Set the gauge for the side of the mortise nearest the face edge. With
+this setting, mark all the mortises, then set for the second side of the
+mortise and complete the gauging.
+
+There are two ways of cutting small mortises in common use. One is by
+using a chisel of a width just equal to that of the mortise. The other
+is by using a smaller chisel after the mortise has first been bored with
+the brace and bit. In the first method the cutting is begun at the
+middle of the mortise where a V-shaped opening is made the full depth of
+the mortise that is to be. Continuing from the middle, vertical cuts are
+taken first toward one end and then toward the other. The chips are
+pried out as the cutting proceeds. In making the last cut this prying
+must be omitted, otherwise the edge of the mortise would be ruined. It
+will be necessary to stand so as to look along the opening in order to
+get the sides plumb.
+
+This method of cutting, when once the "knack" has been attained, will be
+found much easier, quicker and more accurate for small openings, such as
+these, than the usual method. The second method, which is the usual one,
+needs no description.
+
+[Illustration: Details of Mission Chair Construction]
+
+The rails should next have the tenons cut on their ends. It may not be
+out of place to remind the amateur that the lengths of the various like
+pieces can best be laid off by placing them on the bench, measuring off
+the proper distances on one of them and then with try-square marking
+across the edges of all of them at once. This not only saves time in
+that but one set of measurements need be made, but it insures all the
+pieces being similarly laid off. In measuring off for the shoulders of
+the tenons, begin at the middle of the length of the rail and measure
+half of the distance each way. By doing so, if there are any slight
+differences in the lengths of the pieces this difference will be divided
+between the two tenons and no harm will be done.
+
+In gauging the tenons take the precaution to mark a working face and
+joint edge, even if all the surfaces were finish-planed at the mill. It
+is very important that all tenon gauging be done from these faces. The
+same is true of the legs or posts, and the slats if there are to be any.
+
+To avoid confusion it is well to number each tenon by means of the
+chisel with a Roman numeral and its corresponding mortise with the same.
+This will prevent the fitting of one tenon into more than one mortise.
+
+Put the parts together with warm glue if it can be had, otherwise use
+the prepared cold glue. In cold weather the wood ought to be warmed
+before the glue is applied. Put the ends of the chair together first.
+When the glue has set on these put the other rails in place.
+
+When clamping up the second set of rails make sure the frame of the
+chair is square. The best way to test for squareness is to measure the
+diagonals with a stick. Spring the frame until they measure alike, using
+a brace to hold the frame in position until the glue can harden.
+
+Before staining, scrape off any surplus glue, for stain will not adhere
+to glue and a white spot will be the result of failing to remove it.
+Fasten cleats to the front and back rails with screws. To these cleats
+fasten the slats as shown in the drawing. A cushion of Spanish leather,
+such as is shown in the photograph, can be bought at the furniture store
+or the upholsterer's. It can be made by the amateur quite easily,
+however. The two parts are fastened together with leather thongs and the
+filling is of hair or elastic felt. A cushion for the back might well be
+provided.
+
+To finish the wood to match a brown leather proceed as follows: With a
+cloth or brush, stain the wood with brown Flemish water stain diluted by
+the addition of four parts of water. When this has dried, sandpaper
+smooth, using No. 00 paper held on the tips of the fingers. Apply a dark
+brown filler. When this has flatted, i.e., when the gloss has
+disappeared, which will be in the course of ten or fifteen minutes, wipe
+off clean with excelsior and then with waste or a cloth. Allow this to
+dry over night, then apply two or three coats of wax. Polish each coat
+with a flannel cloth by briskly rubbing it.
+
+A settle can be made after this design by using longer front and back
+rails. Rails 42 in. between shoulders will make a good length for a
+settle.
+
+
+
+
+HOW TO MAKE AND FINISH A MAGAZINE STAND
+
+
+For the magazine stand shown herewith there will be needed the following
+pieces:
+
+  1 top, 7/8 in. by 15-1/2 in. by 16-1/2 in.
+  1 shelf, 7/8 in. by 11-1/2 in. by 12-1/2 in.
+  1 shelf, 7/8 in. by 12-1/2 in. by 14-3/4 in.
+  1 shelf, 7/8 in. by 13-1/2 in. by 16-1/2 in.
+  2 sides, 7/8 in. by 14-1/2 in. by 33-1/2 in.
+  1 brace, 7/8 in. by 3-1/4 in. by 17 in.
+  1 brace, 7/8 in. by 2-1/2 in. by 11-1/2 in.
+  6 braces, 7/8 in. by 2 in. by 2 in.
+
+Order these pieces mill-planed on two surfaces to the thickness
+specified above and also sandpapered. Quarter-sawed white oak makes the
+best appearance of all the woods that are comparatively easy to obtain.
+Plain sawed red or white oak will look well but are more liable to warp
+than the quarter-sawed. This is quite an element in pieces as wide as
+these.
+
+Begin work on the sides first. Plane a joint edge on each and from this
+work the two ends. The ends will be square to the joint edge but beveled
+to the working face. A bevel square will be needed for testing these
+beveled ends.
+
+To set the bevel make a drawing, full size or nearly so, of the front
+view and place the bevel on the drawing, adjusting its sides to the
+angle wanted. Work from a center line in laying off the drawing.
+
+Having planed the ends, lay off the sides. This is done by measuring
+from the joint edge along the bottom 14 in., from the joint edge along
+the top 1-1/2 in. and from this 11 in. Connect the points by means of a
+pencil and straightedge.
+
+[Illustration: Completed Stand]
+
+Before cutting off the joint edges of the pieces measure off and square
+lines across to indicate the locations of the shelves. Put both pieces
+together and mark across both joint edges at once to insure getting both
+laid off alike.
+
+The design at the bottom can be varied to suit the fancy of the worker.
+For such a design as is shown, draw on paper, full size, half of it;
+fold on the center line and with scissors cut both sides of the outline
+by cutting along the line just drawn. Trace around this pattern on the
+wood, and saw out with compass or turning saw.
+
+The shelves may now be made. The bevel of the ends of the shelves will
+be the same as for the ends of the side pieces. The lengths may be
+obtained by measuring the drawing. Remember that length is always
+measured along the grain and that the end grain of the shelves must
+extend from side to side in this stand. The widths may be obtained by
+measuring the width of the sides at the points marked out on them for
+the location of the shelf ends. It is best not to have the shelves the
+full width of the sides, since the edges of the shelves are to be faced
+with leather. Make each shelf 1/2 in. less than the width of the side,
+at the place that the shelf is to be fastened.
+
+The top will be squared up in the usual manner, 15 in. wide by 16 in.
+long.
+
+These parts may now be put together. They may be fastened in any one of
+a variety of ways. Round-head blued screws may be placed at regular
+intervals through the sides. Finishing nails may be used and the heads
+set and covered with putty stained to match the wood. Finish nails may
+be placed at regular intervals and fancy headed nails used to cover the
+heads.
+
+[Illustration: Details of the Magazine Stand]
+
+The braces should be formed and fitted but not fastened until the finish
+has been applied. Thoroughly scrape and sandpaper all parts not already
+so treated. Probably no other finish appeals to so many people as golden
+oak. There is no fixed standard of color for golden oak. Different
+manufacturers have set standards in their part of the country, but the
+prevailing idea of golden oak is usually that of a rich reddish brown.
+
+Proceed as follows: Egg shell gloss: 1.--One coat of golden oak water
+stain, diluted with water if a light golden is desired. 2.--Allow time
+to dry, then sandpaper lightly with fine sandpaper. This is to smooth
+the grain and to bring up the high lights by removing the stain from the
+wood. Use No. 00 sandpaper and hold it on the finger tips. 3.--Apply a
+second coat of the stain diluted about one-half with water. This will
+throw the grain into still higher relief and thus produce a still
+greater contrast. Apply this coat of stain very sparingly, using a rag.
+Should this stain raise the grain, again rub lightly with fine worn
+sandpaper, just enough to smooth. 4.--When this has dried, put on a
+light coat of thin shellac. Shellac precedes filling that it may prevent
+the high lights--the solid parts of the wood--from being discolored by
+the stain in the filler, and thus causing a muddy effect. The shellac
+being thin does not interfere with the filler's entering the pores of
+the open grain. 5.--Sand lightly with fine sandpaper. 6.--Fill with
+paste filler colored to match the stain. 7.--Cover this with a coat of
+orange shellac. This coat of shellac might be omitted, but another coat
+of varnish must be added. 8.--Sandpaper lightly. 9.--Apply two or three
+coats of varnish. 10.--Rub the first coats with hair cloth or curled
+hair and then with pulverized pumice stone, crude oil or linseed oil.
+Affix the braces just after filling, using brads and puttying the holes
+with putty colored to match the filler. The shelves may be faced with
+thin leather harmonizing with the oak, ornamental headed tacks being
+used to fasten it in place.
+
+
+
+
+HOME-MADE LAWN SWING
+
+
+[Illustration: The Completed Swing]
+
+The coming of spring and summer calls forth various kinds of porch and
+lawn furniture. A porch or lawn swing to accommodate two or more persons
+is a thing desired by most people. The lawn swing as shown in the
+picture is portable and does not need stakes to hold it to the ground.
+While this swing is substantial and rigid it can be moved from place to
+place on the lawn, or the chains can be fastened with heavy hooks to the
+ceiling of a porch instead of using the stand. Either ropes or chains
+may be used to hang the swing and should be of such length that the seat
+will be about 20 in. from the ground or floor.
+
+The drawing giving the dimensions for constructing the seat shows how
+the parts are put together. The front and back apron pieces are mortised
+to receive a 1-in. square tenon cut on the crosspieces that support the
+slats. Each end of the apron pieces extends 4 in., and a hole is bored
+at A into which the hanging ropes or chains are fastened. If ropes are
+used, bore the holes to fit the rope and when the end of each rope is
+put through a hole it is tied in a knot to keep from slipping out.
+Chains can be fastened with eye bolts. Small carriage or stove bolts are
+used to hold the slats on the framework and cross pieces. The arm rests
+are fastened with wood screws.
+
+[Illustration: Details of Seat]
+
+The drawing for the stand gives all the dimensions for its construction.
+Split the upright pieces or legs with a saw cut to the length as shown.
+A bolt should be put through each piece edgewise at the end of the saw
+cut, to keep the wood from splitting any farther when the ends are
+spread to receive the bolts through the cross pieces at the top. The
+upper ends of the ropes or chains are fastened close to and under the
+bolt holding the inside forks of the uprights. This bolt can be long
+enough to fasten a clevis that will hang underneath for this purpose.
+The whole swing can be painted with a forest green color which is very
+suitable for summer outdoor furniture.
+
+[Illustration: Showing Construction of Stand]
+
+
+
+
+HOW TO MAKE A PORTABLE TABLE
+
+
+[Illustration: Table for Outdoor Use]
+
+A table for outdoor use that can be taken apart, stored or changed from
+place to place may be made at small expense. Fasten cleats with screws,
+as shown in Fig. 1, to the bottom of a board of suitable size. The legs
+are built with a cross piece, A, Fig. 4, at the top which fits into slot
+formed by the cleats, CC, and a crosspiece, B, that has two cleats, D,
+making a place to receive the bottom end of the brace, E, Fig. 2. The
+upper ends of the braces, EE, fit in between two pieces, F, fastened in
+the middle of the board. The three pins fitting loosely in DD and F,
+Fig. 2, are all that holds table together. The end view is shown in Fig.
+3.
+
+
+
+
+HOW TO MAKE A COMBINATION BILLIARD TABLE AND DAVENPORT
+
+
+A small size billiard table which can be converted quickly into a
+davenport is made as follows: Secure clear, selected plain sawed white
+oak in sizes as indicated by the drawing. Have these planed at the mill
+to the widths and thicknesses specified.
+
+The lower part should be made first. Cut the four posts to length,
+chamfering the ends somewhat so that they will not splinter when in use.
+Lay out and cut the mortises which are to receive the rails. The lower
+rails are to be 1-1/8 in. thick and the mortises are to be laid out in
+the legs so as to bring their outer surfaces almost flush with those of
+the posts. The upper rails are 2-1/4 in. wide. The slats are 3/4 in.
+thick. Tenons should be thoroughly pinned to the sides of the mortises
+as shown in the illustration. The braces are 1-3/4 in. thick and are
+fastened to place with roundhead screws and glue.
+
+The seat may be made by putting in a solid bottom that shall rest upon
+cleats fastened to the inner surfaces of the rails. The top of this
+bottom should rest about 3/4 in. below the top edge of the rails. A well
+filled leather cushion completes this part.
+
+A more satisfactory result is obtained by putting in springs and
+upholstering the seat. Upon this the leather cushion can be placed.
+
+[Illustration: By Swinging the Top Back the Table is Transformed into
+the Elegant Davenport Seen on the Opposite Page]
+
+[Illustration: The Billiard Table as Converted into a Luxurious
+Davenport--A Child Can Make the Change in a Moment]
+
+The top or table is built upon and about a heavy frame of well seasoned
+1-3/4-in. by 5-3/4-in. white pine. The parts to this frame are
+thoroughly mortised and tenoned together. Middle stretchers, lengthwise
+and crosswise, give added strength and rigidity. Upon this frame the
+slate bed is leveled by planing the frame wherever necessary. Slats are
+fastened to the bed by screws, the heads of which are countersunk so
+that they may be covered over even with plaster of paris.
+
+[Illustration: Details Showing Dimensions of Parts]
+
+The top and side facings are built together, the angle being reinforced
+with block and glue, as shown in detail. These facings, to which the
+cushions are attached, are afterward made fast to the frame by
+ornamental headed screws. The detail and photograph show the manner of
+applying the under facing.
+
+Before attaching the top and side facings, the bed cloth should be
+placed over the slate and fastened. The nap of the cloth should run from
+the head toward the opposite end of the table. Draw the cloth as tight
+as possible, taking care that there shall be no wrinkles.
+
+The billiard cushions can be bought ready to cover. The bumpers which
+keep the top from striking the front posts can be obtained by making
+proper selection from oak door bumpers carried in stock by hardware
+dealers. The brass swing bars, most likely, can be obtained at the same
+place.
+
+The upholstering on the under side of the top--the back of the
+davenport--is to be built upon a stout frame made of some suitable
+common wood, and the whole set in the recess formed as shown in the
+detail drawing--the whole being fastened from the back before the slate
+bed is put in position.
+
+Effort should be made to select leather of a color that will harmonize
+with the wood finish which is to be applied.
+
+
+
+
+EASILY MADE BOOK SHELVES
+
+
+Very cheap but useful and attractive book shelves are shown in the
+accompanying drawing. The vertical strips, A, may be 3/4 in. by 2 in.
+and are screwed to four shelves, B, each cut to the shape of a quarter
+circle. The screws are all countersunk and as the heads all come on the
+side next to the wall, they do not show. The design might be varied
+somewhat to suit the fancy of the builder, although the appearance of
+the shelves constructed as shown is very pleasing, especially so if the
+workmanship is good and the wood carefully stained and varnished. The
+total cost of construction was less than 75 cents.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+
+
+
+A BLACKING CASE TABOURET
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+A substantial piece of mission furniture which may be used as a tabouret
+or plant stand as well as a blacking case, in which there is a
+receptacle for brushes, blacking and a shoe rest, is shown in the
+illustration. The stock can be secured mill-planed, sandpapered and in
+lengths almost ready to be assembled. The stock list consists of the
+following pieces:
+
+  4 posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 17 in.
+  4 side rails, 1 by 6-1/2 by 9-1/2 in.
+  2 top pieces, 1 by 8-1/4 by 16-1/2 in.
+  1 bottom, 1/4 by 9-1/2 by 9-1/2 in.
+  1 cleat, 1 by 1 by 18 in.
+
+The posts and cleat are surfaced on four sides, while the other pieces
+are surfaced on only two sides. The allowance of 1/2 in. on the side
+rails, top and bottom, is for fitting the joints. Be sure the surfaces
+of the pieces for the posts are square and the ends sawed square off,
+making the posts exactly the same length when they come from the mill.
+
+[Illustration: Details of Shoe Rest]
+
+Square up the four side rails to 6 by 9 in. Cut one end of each post
+tapering with a chisel; face and sandpaper the posts and side rails
+before making the joints. The side rails are attached to the posts with
+three dowels to each joint. The place for each dowel is located by
+making a line exactly in the middle lengthwise on each end of each side
+rail. Three lines are made to intersect this middle line, as shown in
+the detail. Drive a 1/2-in. brad in each intersection allowing a small
+portion of each brad to project, and cut off the heads. Gauge a line in
+the middle of each post at the top where the joints are to be made and
+press the end of a side rail containing the brads against the post. This
+will mark the places to bore holes for the dowels. Pull out the brads
+and bore holes for the dowel pins.
+
+[Illustration: Details of Tabouret Construction]
+
+When gluing up the side rails and posts, first put on a coat of glue on
+the ends of the side rails and let it dry. This will fill up the pores
+in the end grain of the wood which will make a strong joint when
+finally glued together. The dowel pins are made 3/8 in. square with a
+slight taper at the ends. These can be easily forced into the holes,
+when the ends of the side rails are coated with glue and ready to be put
+together, by clamps pressing on the outside of the posts.
+
+The bottom is held in position with narrow strips tacked on the lower
+edge of the side rails. Square up the top pieces to 8 by 16 in. and
+fasten one piece to the top with cleats and screws as shown in the
+drawing. The other piece is hinged to the first one with two 2-in.
+hinges.
+
+The shoe rest can be made from a block of wood and covered with sheet
+tin, copper or brass, or a cast-iron rest can be purchased. The rest is
+fastened to the under side of the hinged top. Stain the wood any dark
+color and apply a very thin coat of shellac. Put on wax and you will
+have a finish that can be renewed at any time by wiping with a little
+turpentine and rewaxing.
+
+
+
+
+HOW TO MAKE A ROLL TOP DESK
+
+
+[Illustration: The Desk Complete]
+
+The materials for this roll top desk can be purchased from a mill
+dressed and sandpapered so the hardest part of the work will be
+finished. The wood must be selected to suit the builder and to match
+other articles of furniture. The following list of materials will be
+required:
+
+   68 lineal ft. of 1 by 3 in. hardwood.
+   65 lineal ft. of 1 by 2 in. hardwood.
+    3 lineal ft. of 1/4 by 24 in. hardwood.
+   45 lineal ft. of 1/4 by 10-1/2 in. hardwood.
+   36 lineal ft. of 1 by 12 in. hardwood.
+   35 lineal ft. of 3/8 by 9 in. soft wood.
+  100 sq. ft. of 1/2 by 12 in. soft wood.
+    1 piece 34 in. wide and 54 in. long hardwood.
+   30 pieces 1 by 1 in. 48 in. long.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+The upper and lower back panels are constructed very similar, the only
+difference being in the height. The inside edge of the 3-in. pieces is
+plowed with a 1/4-in. plow 3/8 in. deep exactly in the center and also
+both edges of each 2-in. piece. The 16-in. pieces in the upper back
+panel and the 24-in. pieces in the lower back panel must be cut 1/2 in.
+longer and a 1/4-in. tongue made on each end to fit into the plowed
+groove and form a mortise joint.
+
+The upper back panel is filled in with four boards 9-1/2 in. wide and
+16-1/2 in. long, while the four boards in the lower back panel are 9-1/2
+in. wide and 24-1/2 in. long cut from the 1/4-in. hard wood. When the
+grooves are cut properly, the joints made perfect and the boards fitted
+to the right size, these two panels can be assembled and pressed
+together in cabinet clamps. This will make the outside dimensions as
+given in the drawing.
+
+The end panels are made very similar to the lower back panel, the only
+difference being in the width of the filling boards, which are 10-1/2
+in. for the outside end panels and 10 in. for the inside panels. One end
+panel and one inside panel make the sides of one pedestal. As the end
+panels are 1 in. wider than the inside panels they overlap the back
+panel and cover up the rough ends of the boards. A 1-in. piece 2 in.
+wide is fastened at the top and bottom of each end and inside panels as
+shown by the dotted lines. The lower back panel is fastened on by
+turning screws through the back and into the ends of these pieces. The
+bottom pieces have 2-in. notches cut out, as shown, into which to fit
+two crosspieces across the bottom of the pedestal for holding the
+casters. The top end panels are made as shown in the drawing, the
+inside edge of the pieces being plowed out, making a groove the same
+size as in the other pieces of the panels. The panel board is cut to the
+proper shape from the 1/4-by 24-in. material. The length given in the
+material list will be sufficient if the pointed ends are allowed to pass
+each other when laying out the design.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+Instead of cutting a groove for the roll top curtain, one is made by
+fastening a 1/2-by 3/4-in. strip 7/8 in. down from the edge and on the
+inside of the panel. A thin 1/4-by 1-3/4-in. strip is bent to form the
+shape of the edge and fastened with round-headed brass screws. A 1-in.
+piece is fastened at the back and a groove cut into it as shown by the
+dotted line into which to slide a 1/4-in. back board. The top is a
+12-in. board 54 in. long.
+
+As both pedestals are made alike, the detail of only one is shown. The
+partitions upon which the drawers slide are made up from 1-in. square
+material with a 2-in. end fitted as shown. Dimensions are given for the
+divisions of each drawer, but these can be changed to suit the builder.
+The detail of one drawer is shown, giving the length and width, the
+height being that of the top drawer. The roll top curtain is made up
+from 1-in. pieces 3/4 in. thick and 48 in. long, cut in an oval shape on
+the outside, tacked and glued to a piece of strong canvas on the inside.
+The end piece is 2 in. wide, into which two lift holes or grooves are
+cut and a lock attached in the middle of the edge. A drawer lock can be
+made as shown and attached to the back panel and operated by the back
+end of the roll top curtain when it is opened and closed.
+
+The top board, which is 34 by 54 in., can be fitted with end pieces as
+shown or left in one piece with the edges made rounding.
+
+At this point in the construction of the parts they can be put together.
+The sides of each pedestal are fastened together by screws passed
+through the 1-in. square pieces forming the partition and into the sides
+of the panels. When each pedestal is put together the lower back panel
+is fastened to them with screws turned into the pieces provided as
+stated in making the end panels. The top board is now adjusted with
+equal edges projecting and fastened in position with finishing nails. As
+the top panels cover directly over where the nails are driven, the heads
+will not show. The upper back panel is fastened to the curved ends and
+the whole top held to the top board with cast corner brackets that can
+be purchased at any hardware store. The top should not be drawn
+together too close before the 1/4-in. back board is put in the grooves
+and the roll top curtain placed in position.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+The detail showing the pigeon holes gives sizes for 30 openings 3 by 4
+in., two book stalls at the ends, 3 in. wide, and two small drawers.
+This frame is built up as shown from the 3/8-in. soft wood, and fastened
+in the back part of the top with small brads.
+
+
+
+
+HOW TO MAKE A ROMAN CHAIR
+
+
+In making this roman chair, as well as other articles of mission
+furniture, the materials can be ordered from the mill with much of the
+hard work completed. Order the stock to make this chair as follows:
+
+  4 posts, 1-7/8 by 1-7/8 by 30 in.
+  2 top rails, 7/8 by 2-3/4 by 20 in.
+  2 bottom rails, 7/8 by 2-1/4 by 20 in.
+  2 rails, 7/8 by 4 by 16 in.
+  2 side rails, 7/8 by 4 by 28 in.
+  1 stretcher, 7/8 by 3 by 30 in.
+
+[Illustration: The Roman Chair]
+
+Have all these pieces mill planed on the four sides straight and square,
+also have them sandpapered on the four sides of each. Plain sawed white
+or red oak finishes nicely and is easily obtained. The sizes are
+specified exact as to thickness and width, but the lengths are longer
+than is needed. This is to allow for cutting and fitting.
+
+Begin by squaring one end of each post; measure the length 28 in. and,
+placing all of them side by side, square a line across the four, saw,
+then plane these ends square. The top and bottom side rails are treated
+in a similar manner, their length being 19-1/8 in. each. These pieces
+extend right through the posts projecting 5/8 in. beyond the surface.
+The mortises in the posts must be cut smoothly and of exact size. Wood
+pins fasten these rails and posts together. The other rails have tenons
+1/2 by 3 in. shouldered on the two edges and one side. The mortise in
+the post is placed central. On the ends of the chair the shouldered side
+is turned in (see photograph), while on the front and back they are
+turned out. Miter the ends of these tenons. These tenons are to be glued
+and clamped--the ends of the chair being put together first. When this
+is dry the sides are clamped. The stretcher should have its ends
+shouldered on the two edges so as to make a 2-1/2-in. tenon. Allow the
+tenons to extend 1-1/8 in. beyond the cross rail and cut mortises in
+these tenons for the keys.
+
+All projecting tenons, as well as the tops and bottoms of the posts,
+should be chamfered about 1/8 in. For the seat, screw cleats to the
+insides of the rails and place a platform of thin boards so that its top
+surface is 1/2 in. below the top of the rails.
+
+A cushion can be made, as shown in the photograph, by lacing with
+leather thongs two pieces of Spanish leather cut to proper length and
+width. When nearly laced fill with any of the common upholsterer's
+fillings.
+
+[Illustration: Details of Parts of Chair]
+
+For a brown stain, dissolve by boiling in 4 oz. of water, extract of
+logwood the size of a walnut. Apply hot and repeat until the desired
+color is obtained. Stains can be bought ready prepared, however, and are
+quite satisfactory. Finish by applying several coats of wax.
+
+
+
+
+HOW TO MAKE A SETTEE
+
+
+This handsome piece of mission furniture is designed to be made up in
+three different pieces as desired, the only changes necessary being in
+the length of the one front and the two back rails. The settee can be
+made into a three-cushion length by adding the length of another cushion
+to the dimensions of the one front and two back rails. A companion piece
+chair can be made by using suitable length rails to admit only one
+cushion. The following stock list of materials ordered mill-planed and
+sandpapered will be sufficient to make up the settee as illustrated. Oak
+is the most suitable wood which can be finished in either mission or a
+dark golden oak.
+
+   3 rails 1 by 4 by 52-1/4 in.
+   4 end rails 1 by 4 by 24-1/4 in.
+   4 posts 2-1/4 in. square by 34-1/2 in.
+  13 slats 1/2 by 5 by 21-1/4 in.
+   2 cleats 1 in. square by 51 in.
+
+All the rails are mortised into the posts for a depth of 5/8 in., also
+the slats are mortised 5/8 in. into the rails. The material list gives
+the exact dimensions for the rails and slats as they will not need to be
+squared for entering the mortises, provided you are careful to get all
+lengths cut to dimensions. When cutting the mortises take care to get
+them square and clean. The posts have 1/2 in. extra added for squaring
+up and cutting the corners sloping on the top ends.
+
+The joints are all put together with glue. Nails can be driven into the
+posts intersecting the tenons of the rails on the inside, as they will
+not show and will help to make the settee more solid.
+
+[Illustration: A Complete Two-Cushion Settee]
+
+[Illustration: Details of a Mission Settee]
+
+The cushions can be made with or without springs as desired. If made
+without springs, 15 slats must be provided in the material list 1/2 in.
+thick, 2 in. wide and 24 in. long to be placed on the cleats fastened
+to the inside of each bottom rail. The two cleats are fastened one on
+each inside of the front and back rails with screws. The location as to
+height of these cleats will depend upon the kind of cushions used. The
+parts necessary to make the cushions with springs are as follows:
+
+   4 pieces 1 by 2-1/2 by 26 in.
+   8 pieces 1 by 2-1/2 by 24 in.
+   4 pieces 1 by 2-1/2 by 22 in.
+  32 8-in. springs.
+   2 pieces leather about 29 by 31 in.
+
+[Illustration: Details of the Cushion]
+
+An open box is made from two 26-in. and two 22-in. pieces, and across
+the bottom are mortised and set in four 24-in. pieces to form slats on
+which to set the springs. The tops of the springs are tied or anchored
+with stout cords running in both directions and fastened to the inside
+of the pieces forming the open box. These should be tied in such manner
+as to hold each spring so it cannot slip over and come in contact with
+another spring.
+
+Roan or pebbled leather are very popular for cushions for this style of
+furniture. The leather is drawn over the springs and tacked to the
+outside of the open box frame. When complete the cushions are set in
+loose on the cleats, which should, in this case, be placed about 1 in.
+from the top of the rails.
+
+
+
+
+HOW TO MAKE A PYROGRAPHER'S TABLE
+
+
+[Illustration: Convenient Pyrographer's Table]
+
+Any pyrographer will appreciate the construction of the table and
+cabinet as illustrated. Anyone doing burnt wood work will know the
+annoyance of building up a steady support for the arm to the level of
+the article on which the work is to be done. The size of this table may
+be made to suit the surroundings and the space of the builder. Figure 1
+shows the table with a slot cut in the side support in which to place
+the thumb screw of the bracket as shown on top of the table. It will be
+noticed, Fig. 2, that while both drawer and cabinet are available for
+storing the apparatus, they are not in the way of the operator while
+sitting at his work; the drawer overhangs the knees and the cabinet is
+far enough back not to interfere with sitting up close to the work. The
+bracket shelf slides in the slot at the side of the table, and is
+fastened to any height by the thumb screw There is also a smaller slide
+bracket on the shelf to clamp irregular objects to the side of the
+table. The thumb screws, hinges and drawer pulls can be purchased from
+any hardware store. When the table is not in use for pyrography it can
+be used for a writing table or a round top provided and attached on
+which to play games. When used for this purpose the bracket, as well as
+the pyrographic outfit, is stowed away in the cabinet as shown in Fig.
+3.
+
+[Illustration: Storage for Apparatus]
+
+
+
+
+MISSION STAINS
+
+
+What is mission oak stain? There are many on the market, with hardly two
+alike in tone. The true mission oak stain may be said to show a dull
+gray, the flakes showing a reddish tint, while the grain of the wood
+will be almost a dead black. To produce such a stain take 1 lb. of drop
+black in oil and 1/2 oz, of rose pink in oil, adding a gill of best
+japan drier, thinning with three half-pints of turpentine. This will
+make about 1 qt. of stain. Use these proportions for a larger quantity
+of stain. Strain it through cheese cloth. Japan colors will give a
+quicker drying stain than that made with oil colors, and in this case
+omit the japan and add a little varnish to bind it.
+
+One of the most popular of all the fancy oaks has been that known as
+Flemish, and this in spite of its very somber color, says Wood Craft.
+There are several ways of producing Flemish finish; you can fill the
+wood with a paste filler strained with raw umber, and when dry apply a
+stain of transparent flat raw umber, and for the darker shades of finish
+use drop black with the umber. Varnish and rub down.
+
+According to a foreign technical journal, French workmen mahoganize
+various kinds of woods by the following method: The surface of the wood
+to be stained is made perfectly smooth. Then it is given a coating of
+dilute nitric acid which is rubbed well into the wood fiber. Then it is
+stained with a mixture made by dissolving 1-1/2 oz. of dragon's blood in
+a pint of alcohol, this solution being filtered, and then there is added
+to it one-third of its weight of sodium carbonate. Apply this mixture
+with a brush, and repeat the coats at intervals until the surface has
+the appearance of polished mahogany. In case the luster should fail it
+may be restored by rubbing with a little raw linseed oil. The
+description of the process is meager, and hence he who would try it will
+have to experiment a little.
+
+A good cheap mission effect for oak is to mix together equal parts of
+boiled linseed oil and good asphaltum varnish, and apply this to the
+wood with a brush; in a minute or so you may rub off surplus with a rag,
+and when dry give a coat of varnish. A gallon of this stain will cover
+about 600 sq. ft.
+
+
+
+
+FILLING OAK
+
+
+A very good hardwood filler for oak, either for a natural or golden
+effect, may be made from two parts of turpentine and one part of raw
+linseed oil, with a small amount of good japan to dry in the usual time.
+To this liquid add bolted gilder's whiting to form a suitable paste, it
+may be made thin enough for use, if to be used at once, or into a stiff
+paste for future use, when it can be thinned down for use, says
+Woodworkers' Review. After applying a coat of filler, let stand until it
+turns gray, which requires about 20 minutes, depending upon the amount
+of japan in the filler, when it should be rubbed off with cotton waste
+or whatever you use for the purpose. A filler must be rubbed well into
+the wood, the surplus only being removed. The application of a coat of
+burnt umber stain to the wood before filling is in order, which will
+darken the wood to the proper depth if you rub off the surplus, showing
+the grain and giving a golden oak effect. The filling should stand at
+least a day and night before applying shellac and varnish.
+
+
+
+
+WAX FINISHING
+
+
+In wax-finishing hardwoods, use a paste filler and shellac varnish to
+get a good surface. Of course, the wax may also be rubbed into the
+unfilled wood but that gives you quite a different effect from the
+regular wax polish, says a correspondent of Wood Craft. With soft woods
+you first apply a stain, then apply a liquid filler or shellac,
+according to the quality of work to be done. The former for the cheaper
+job. The usual proportion of wax and turpentine is two parts of the
+former to one part of the latter, melting the wax first, then adding the
+spirits of turpentine. For reviving or polishing furniture you can add
+three or four times as much turpentine as wax, all these proportions to
+be by weight. To produce the desired egg-shell gloss, rub vigorously
+with a brush of stiff bristles or woolen rag.
+
+
+
+
+THE FUMING OF OAK
+
+
+Darkened oak always has a better appearance when fumed with ammonia.
+This process is rather a difficult one, as it requires an airtight case,
+but the description herewith given may be entered into with as large a
+case as the builder cares to construct.
+
+Oak articles can be treated in a case made from a tin biscuit box, or
+any other metal receptacle of good proportions, provided it is airtight.
+The oak to be fumed is arranged in the box so the fumes will entirely
+surround the piece; the article may be propped up with small sticks, or
+suspended by a string. The chief point is to see that no part of the
+wood is covered up and that all surfaces are exposed to the fumes. A
+saucer of ammonia is placed in the bottom of the box, the lid or cover
+closed, and all joints sealed up by pasting heavy brown paper over them.
+Any leakage will be detected if the nose is placed near the tin and
+farther application of the paper will stop the holes. A hole may be cut
+in the cover and a piece of glass fitted in, taking care to have all the
+edges closed. The process may be watched through the glass and the
+article removed when the oak is fumed to the desired shade. Wood stained
+in this manner should not be French polished or varnished, but waxed.
+
+The process of waxing is simple: Cut some bees-wax into fine shreds and
+place them in a small pot or jar. Pour in a little turpentine, and set
+aside for half a day, giving it an occasional stir. The wax must be
+thoroughly dissolved and then more turpentine added until the
+preparation has the consistency of a thick cream. This can be applied to
+the wood with a rag and afterward brushed up with a stiff brush.
+
+
+
+
+HOW TO MAKE BLACK WAX
+
+
+When putting a wax finish on oak or any open-grained wood, the wax will
+often show white streaks in the pores of the wood. These streaks cannot
+be removed by rubbing or brushing. Prepared black wax can be purchased,
+but if you do not have any on hand, ordinary floor wax can be colored
+black. Melt the floor wax in a can placed in a bucket of hot water. When
+the wax has become liquid mix thoroughly into it a little drop black or
+lampblack. Allow the wax to cool and harden. This wax will not streak,
+but will give a smooth, glossy finish.
+
+
+
+
+THE 40 STYLES OF CHAIRS
+
+
+There are 40 distinct styles of chairs embracing the period from 3000
+B.C. to 1900 A.D.--nearly 7,000 years. Of all the millions of chairs
+made during the centuries, each one can be classified under one or more
+of the 40 general styles shown in the chart. This chart was compiled by
+the editor of Decorative Furniture. The Colonial does not appear on the
+chart because it classifies under the Jacobean and other styles. A
+condensed key to the chart follows:
+
+     $Egyptian.--3000 B.C. to 500 B.C.$ Seems to have been derived
+     largely from the Early Asian. It influenced Assyrian and Greek
+     decorations, and was used as a motif in some French Empire
+     decoration. Not used in its entirety except for lodge rooms, etc.
+
+     $Grecian.--700 B.C. to 200 B.C.$ Influenced by Egyptian and
+     Assyrian styles. It had a progressive growth through the Doric,
+     Ionic and Corinthian periods. It influenced the Roman style and the
+     Pompeian, and all the Renaissance styles, and all styles following
+     the Renaissance, and is still the most important factor in
+     decorations today.
+
+     $Roman.--750 B.C. to 450 A.D.$ Rome took her art entirely from
+     Greece, and the Roman is purely a Greek development. The Roman
+     style "revived" in the Renaissance, and in this way is still a
+     prominent factor in modern decoration.
+
+     $Pompeian.--100 B.C. to 79 A.D.$ Sometimes called the Grecian-Roman
+     style, which well describes its components. The style we know as
+     Greek was the Greek as used in public structures. The Pompeian is
+     our best idea of Greek domestic decoration. Pompeii was long
+     buried, but when rediscovered it promptly influenced all European
+     styles, including Louis XVI, and the various Georgian styles.
+
+     $Byzantine.--300 A.D. to 1450 A.D.$ The "Eastern Roman" style,
+     originating in the removal of the capital of the Roman Empire to
+     Constantinople (then called Byzantium). It is a combination of
+     Persian and Roman. It influenced the various Moorish, Sacracenic
+     and other Mohammedan styles.
+
+     $Gothic.--1100 to 1550.$ It had nothing to do with the Goths, but
+     was a local European outgrowth of the Romanesque. It spread all
+     over Europe, and reached its climax of development about 1550. It
+     was on the Gothic construction that the Northern European and
+     English Renaissance styles were grafted to form such styles as the
+     Elizabethan, etc.
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+     $Moorish.--700 to 1600.$ The various Mohammedan styles can all be
+     traced to the ancient Persian through the Byzantine. The Moorish or
+     Moresque was the form taken by the Mohammedans in Spain.
+
+     $Indian.--2000 B.C. to 1906 A.D.$ The East Indian style is almost
+     composite, as expected of one with a growth of nearly 4,000 years.
+     It has been influenced repeatedly by outside forces and various
+     religious invasions, and has, in turn, influenced other far Eastern
+     styles.
+
+     $Chinese.--3500 B.C. to 1906 A.D.$ Another of the ancient styles.
+     It had a continuous growth up to 230 B.C., since when it has not
+     changed much. It has influenced Western styles, as in the
+     Chippendale, Queen Anne, etc.
+
+     $Japanese.--1200 B.C. to 1906 A.D.$ A style probably springing
+     originally from China, but now absolutely distinct. It has
+     influenced recent art in Europe and America, especially the "New
+     Art" styles.
+
+     $Italian Gothic.--1100 to 1500.$ The Italian Gothic differs from
+     the European and English Gothic in clinging more closely to the
+     Romanesque-Byzantine originals.
+
+     $Tudor.--1485 to 1558.$ The earliest entry of the Renaissance into
+     England. An application of Renaissance to the Gothic foundations.
+     Its growth was into the Elizabethan.
+
+     $Italian Renaissance, Fifteenth Century.--1400 to 1500.$ The birth
+     century of the Renaissance. A seeking for revival of the old Roman
+     and Greek decorative and constructive forms.
+
+     $Italian Renaissance, Sixteenth Century.--1500 to 1600.$ A period
+     of greater elaboration of detail and more freedom from actual Greek
+     and Roman models.
+
+     $Italian Renaissance, Seventeenth Century.--1600 to 1700.$ The
+     period of great elaboration and beginning of reckless
+     ornamentation.
+
+     $Spanish Renaissance.--1500 to 1700.$ A variation of the
+     Renaissance spirit caused by the combination of three distinct
+     styles--the Renaissance as known in Italy, the Gothic and the
+     Moorish. In furniture the Spanish Renaissance is almost identical
+     with the Flemish, which it influenced.
+
+     $Dutch Renaissance.--1500 to 1700.$ A style influenced alternately
+     by the French and the Spanish. This style and the Flemish had a
+     strong influence on the English William and Mary and Queen Anne
+     styles, and especially on the Jacobean.
+
+     $German Renaissance.--1550 to 1700.$ A style introduced by Germans
+     who had gone to Italy to study. It was a heavy treatment of the
+     Renaissance spirit, and merged into the German Baroque about 1700.
+
+     $Francis I.--1515 to 1549.$ The introductory period when the
+     Italian Renaissance found foothold in France. It is almost purely
+     Italian, and was the forerunner of the Henri II.
+
+     $Henri II.--1549 to 1610.$ In this the French Renaissance became
+     differentiated from the Italian, assuming traits that were
+     specifically French and that were emphasized in the next period.
+
+     $Louis XIII.--1616 to 1643.$ A typically French style, in which but
+     few traces of its derivation from the Italian remained. It was
+     followed by the Louis XIV.
+
+     $Elizabethan.--1558 to 1603.$ A compound style containing traces of
+     the Gothic, much of the Tudor, some Dutch, Flemish and a little
+     Italian. Especially noted for its fine wood carving.
+
+     $Jacobean.--1603 to 1689.$ The English period immediately following
+     the Elizabethan, and in most respects quite similar. The Dutch
+     influence was, however, more prominent. The Cromwellian, which is
+     included in this period, was identical with it.
+
+     $William and Mary.--1689 to 1702.$ More Dutch influences. All
+     furniture lighter and better suited to domestic purposes.
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+
+     $Queen Anne.--1702 to 1714.$ Increasing Dutch influences. Jacobean
+     influence finally discarded. Chinese influence largely present.
+
+     $Louis XIV.--1643 to 1715.$ The greatest French style. An entirely
+     French creation, marked by elegance and dignity. Toward the end of
+     the period it softened into the early Rococo.
+
+     $Georgian.--1714 to 1820.$ A direct outgrowth of the Queen Anne,
+     tempered by the prevailing French styles. It includes Chippendale,
+     Hepplewhite and Sheraton, but these three great cabinetmakers were
+     sufficiently distinct from the average Georgian to be worthy
+     separate classification.
+
+     $Chippendale.--1754 to 1800.$ The greatest English cabinet style.
+     Based on the Queen Anne, but drawing largely from the Rococo,
+     Chinese and Gothic, he produced three distinct types, viz.: French
+     Chippendale, Chinese Chippendale and Gothic Chippendale. The last
+     is a negligible quantity.
+
+     $Louis XV.--1715 to 1774.$ The Rococo period. The result of the
+     efforts of French designers to enliven the Louis XIV, and to evolve
+     a new style out of one that had reached its logical climax.
+
+     $Hepplewhite.--1775 to 1800.$ Succeeded Chippendale as the popular
+     English cabinetmaker. By many he is considered his superior. His
+     work is notable for a charming delicacy of line and design.
+
+     $Louis XVI.--1774 to 1793.$ The French style based on a revival of
+     Greek forms, and influenced by the discovery of the ruins of
+     Pompeii.
+
+     $Sheraton.--1775 to 1800.$ A fellow cabinetmaker, working at same
+     time as Hepplewhite. One of the Colonial styles (Georgian).
+
+     $R. & J. Adam.--1762 to 1800.$ Fathers of an English classic
+     revival. Much like the French Louis XVI and Empire styles in many
+     respects.
+
+     $Empire.--1804 to 1814.$ The style created during the Empire of
+     Napoleon I. Derived from classic Roman suggestions, with some Greek
+     and Egyptian influences.
+
+     $New Arts.--1900 to date.$ These are various worthy attempts by the
+     designers of various nations to create a new style. Some of the
+     results are good, and they are apt to be like the "little girl who
+     had a little curl that hung in the middle of her forehead," in that
+     "when they are good they are very, very good, but when they are bad
+     they are horrid."
+
+[Illustration]
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+
+
+
+HOW TO MAKE A PIANO BENCH
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+All the material used in the making of this piano bench is 1 in. thick,
+excepting the two rails, which are 7/8 in. thick. The bench can be made
+from any of the furniture woods, but the case may demand one made from
+mahogany. If so, this wood can be purchased from a piano factory. The
+following stock list of materials may be ordered from a mill, planed and
+sandpapered:
+
+  1 top, 1 by 16 by 36-1/2 in.
+  2 ends, 1 by 14 by 18 in.
+  1 stretcher, 1 by 4 by 31-1/2 in.
+  2 side rails, 7/8 by 4 by 29-1/2 in.
+  2 keys, 1 by 1 by 3-1/2 in.
+  6 cleats, 1 by 1 by 4 in.
+
+The dimensions given, with the exception of the keys and cleats, are 1/2
+in. longer than necessary for squaring up the ends.
+
+The two rails are cut slanting from a point 1-1/2 in. from each end to
+the center, making them only 3 in. wide in the middle. The rails are
+"let into" the edges of the ends so the outside of the rails and end
+boards will be flush. The joints are put together with glue and screws.
+The cleats are fastened with screws to the inside of the rails and to
+the top. The stretcher has a tenon cut on each end which fits into a
+mortise cut in each end. The tenons will have sufficient length to cut
+the small mortise for the key.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+The kind of wood used will determine the color of the stain for the
+finish. This also depends on matching other pieces of furniture.
+
+
+
+
+HOW TO MAKE A MISSION SHAVING STAND
+
+
+This attractive and useful piece of mission furniture will be
+appreciated by the person that does his own shaving. The shaving stand
+can be made at home by a handy man in his spare time as the stock can be
+ordered from a mill ready for making the joints and attaching the few
+pieces of hardware. The following is a stock list of materials:
+
+  4 posts 1-1/2 in. square by 50-1/2 in.
+  4 slats 7/8 by 1 by 32-1/2 in.
+  2 cross rails 1 by 1-1/2 by 15 in.
+  2 end rails 1 by 1-1/2 by 13 in.
+  1 top 7/8 by 16-1/2 by 19-1/2 in.
+  1 bottom 7/8 by 15 by 17 in.
+  2 ends 7/8 by 12-1/2 in. square.
+  1 back 7/8 by 12-1/2 by 14-1/2 in.
+  1 door 7/8 by 6-1/2 by 12-1/2 in.
+  2 drawer ends 7/8 by 5-1/2 by 7-1/2 in.
+  1 partition 7/8 by 12 by 14 in.
+  1 partition 7/8 by 7 by 14 in.
+  7 pieces of soft wood 1/2 by 7-1/2 by 12 in.
+  2 posts 1 in. square by 10-1/2 in.
+  1 bottom piece 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 18-1/2 in.
+  4 mirror frame pieces 7/8 by 1-1/2 by 14-1/2 in.
+  2 sticks for pins.
+  2 hinges
+  1 lock
+  2 drawer pulls
+  1 beveled glass mirror 11-1/2 by 11-1/2 in.
+
+While this piece of furniture can be made in any kind of wood, the
+novice will find that quarter-sawed oak will work up and finish better
+than the other woods. The stock list given has dimensions 1/2 in. larger
+in some instances for dressing and squaring where necessary.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+The tenons and mortises are first cut for the crosspieces at the bottom
+of the posts, and, as it is best to use dowels at the top, holes are
+bored in the bottom piece and also the ends of the slats for pins. The
+bottom piece is also fastened to the posts with dowels. The bottom must
+have a square piece cut out from each corner almost the same size as the
+posts. When setting the sides together the end board and posts can be
+doweled and glued together and after drying well the posts can be
+spread apart far enough to insert the bottom rail and two slats. The
+rail and slats should be tried for a bit before putting on any glue,
+which may save some trouble.
+
+[Illustration: Shaving Stand Complete]
+
+After the sides are put together, the back is put in and glued. The top
+is then put on and fastened with cleats from the inside. The partitions
+are put in as shown and the door fitted. Two drawers are made from the
+ends and the soft wood material. The drawer ends may be supplied with
+wood pulls of the same material or matched with metal the same as used
+for the hinges.
+
+[Illustration: Mirror Frame and Standards Details]
+
+The pieces for the mirror frame must be rabbeted 1/2 in. deep to take
+the glass, and the ends joined together with a miter at each corner. The
+two short posts are tenoned and mortises cut in the bottom piece for
+joints and these joints well glued together. The bottom piece is then
+fastened to the top board of the stand. This will form the standards in
+which to swing the mirror and its frame. This is done with two pins
+inserted in holes bored through the standards and into the mirror frame.
+
+After the parts are all put together, cleaned and sandpapered, the stand
+is ready for the finish.
+
+
+
+
+A MISSION WASTE-PAPER BASKET
+
+
+[Illustration: Waste-Paper Basket to Match Library Table]
+
+The basket shown in the accompanying sketch is designed to be used with
+a library table having slats in the ends and wooden handles on the
+drawers. The finish is made to match that of the table by fuming, when
+completely assembled, in a large-size size, clean garbage can, with
+fumes of concentrated ammonia.
+
+[Illustration: Detail of Waste-Paper Basket]
+
+The following quarter-sawed white-oak stock should be procured in the
+exact dimensions given. This may be had, planed and cut to lengths, from
+a mill for a slight extra charge. It is advisable not to have them
+sandpapered, as the very coarse sandpaper generally used, gives a bad
+surface for finishing.
+
+   4 posts, 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 16-1/2 in., S-4-S.
+   4 rails, 3/4 by 3 by 10-1/4 in., S-2-S.
+   4 rails, 3/4 by 2 by 10-1/4 in., S-2-S.
+  12 slats, 3/8 by 2-1/4 by 9-1/2 in., S-2-S.
+   4 handle pieces, 1 by 1 by 2-1/2 in., S-4-S.
+   2 handle pieces, 1/2 by 1/2 by 6 in., S-4-S.
+   1 bottom, 3/8 by 9-1/2 by 9-1/2 in., S-2-S.
+
+See that the posts are absolutely square cross section. Mark with a
+pencil--not gauge--the chamfers on the ends of the posts and plane them
+off.
+
+Carefully mark the tenons on the ends of all the rails with a knife and
+gauge lines. Be sure that the distance from the tenon shoulder at one
+end of rail to the shoulder at the other end is exactly the same on each
+rail. Cut the tenons, using a backsaw and chisel.
+
+Arrange the pieces as they are to stand in the finished basket, and
+number each tenon and mortise. Mark all the mortises on the posts, being
+sure to keep the distances between the top and lower rail the same on
+each post. Cut each mortise to fit the correspondingly numbered tenon.
+Next, mark the mortises for the slats in the rails, allowing the whole
+slat to go in 1/4 in.
+
+The handles are next in order. The pieces going into the rail should be
+fastened with a round 1/2-in. tenon cut on one end and glued in place.
+The crosspiece should be mortised all the way through these pieces and
+held in place by a brad from the under side.
+
+Now put the whole basket together without gluing, in order that errors,
+if any, may be detected.
+
+If everything fits perfectly, the basket is ready to be glued. For best
+results hot glue should be used. First glue up two opposite sides with
+the slats in place. Clamps must be used. When these have set for at
+least 24 hours, the other rails and slats may be glued in place and
+clamped. It is a good idea to pin the tenons in place with two 1-in.
+brads driven from the inside.
+
+The handles are then glued in place, using hand screws to hold them
+until the glue sets. The bottom should rest on thin cleats, without
+being nailed to them, so that it may be removed when the basket is to be
+emptied of small papers, etc.
+
+Before applying the stain, see that all glue spots are removed and all
+surfaces sanded to perfect smoothness. If a fumed finish is not desired,
+any good stain may be used, after which a thin coat of shellac and two
+coats of wax should be applied. Allow plenty of time for drying between
+the coats.
+
+
+
+
+A CELLARETTE PEDESTAL
+
+
+[Illustration: Plain-Oak Cellarette Pedestal]
+
+The illustration shows a unique article for the den. It serves as a
+pedestal and has one side which opens on hinges allowing the inside to
+be used as a smoker's cabinet or cellarette. All the lines are straight
+and the corners square, making it easy to construct. White oak will
+make up best, although ash, birch or southern pine may be used with good
+effect.
+
+Stock of the following sizes should be bought, surfaced and cut to width
+and length:
+
+  2 top pieces, 7/8 by 12 by 12 in., S-2-S.
+  2 base pieces, 7/8 by 14 by 14 in., S-2-S.
+  2 sides, 7/8 by 8 by 35-5/8 in., S-2-S.
+  1 back, 7/8 by 6-1/4 by 35-5/8 in., S-2-S.
+  1 door, 7/8 by 6-1/4 by 34-3/4 in., S-2-S.
+  4 blocks, 7/8 by 4 by 4 in., S-2-S.
+  4 shelves, 7/8 by 6-1/4 by 6-1/4 in., S-2-S.
+  4 pieces, 7/8 by 1 by 10 in., S-4-S.
+
+Make the top and base of two pieces, glued and screwed together with the
+grain crossed. This method prevents warping. To keep the end grain from
+showing, a strip of 3/8-in. lumber may be put on all around as shown in
+the drawing.
+
+Have the sides, front and back squared up perfectly. The sides are to
+overlap the back and to be fastened to it with round-head brass or blue
+screws. To the center of the top and base attach one of the 6-1/4-in.
+square pieces. Over these, fit the sides and back and fasten them with
+screws or nails. The four corner blocks are now put under the base.
+
+Two or more shelves may be set in as shown. Brass or copper hinges will
+look well if a dark stain is to be used.
+
+Around the sides and back a 1-in. strip should be fastened to the base
+to give added strength.
+
+If a dull finish is desired, apply two coats of stain and two of
+prepared wax. If a polished surface is wanted, first fill the pores of
+the wood with any standard filler, which can be purchased at a paint
+store. After this has dried partly, rub off any surplus filler, rubbing
+across the grain of the wood. When perfectly dry apply one coat of
+shellac and as many coats of varnish as desired, rubbing down each coat,
+except the last, with No. 00 sandpaper and pumice stone.
+
+[Illustration: Detail of Cellarette Pedestal]
+
+
+
+
+A DRESSER
+
+
+The dresser shown in the illustration was made of quarter-sawed white
+oak and finished golden and waxed. The mirror is of beveled glass and
+the following is the stock bill:
+
+  1 top, 3/4 by 19-1/2 by 33 in., S-2-S.
+  4 posts, 1-3/4 by 1-3/4 by 28 in., S-4-S.
+  4 end rails, 3/4 by 2-1/4 by 17 in., S-2-S.
+  4 stiles, 3/4 by 2-1/2 by 20 in., S-2-S.
+  2 panels, 3/16 by 12 by 18 in., S-2-S.
+  3 facings, 3/4 by 2-1/4 by 29 in., S-2-S.
+  2 top frame pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 32 in., S-2-S.
+  2 top frame pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 19 in., S-2-S.
+  2 mirror supports, 1 by 2 by 33 in., S-2-S.
+  1 mirror support, 3/4 by 2-1/2 by 33 in., S-2-S.
+  1 drawer front, 3/4 by 7-1/4 by 28 in., S-2-S.
+  1 drawer front, 3/4 by 6-1/4 by 28 in., S-2-S.
+  2 drawer fronts, 3/4 by 5-1/4 by 14 in., S-2-S.
+  1 partition, 3/4 by 1 by 6 in.
+  2 mirror-frame pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 40 in., S-2-S.
+  2 mirror-frame pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 20 in., S-2-S.
+
+The following material list may be of common stock and not
+quarter-sawed:
+
+  Mirror-backing pieces equivalent to 1/4 by 18-1/2 by 36 in., S-2-S.
+  2 cleats, 3/4 by 2 by 10 in., S-4-S.
+  4 drawer-support frame pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 29 in.
+  7 drawer-support frame pieces, 3/4 by 2 by 15 in.
+  Slides taken from scrap stock, 3/4 by 1 by 15 in.
+  3 back pieces, 3/4 by 2-1/4 by 28 in., S-2-S.
+  2 back pieces, 1/4 by 8 by 28 in., S-2-S.
+  8 drawer sides, 1/2 by 7-1/4 by 17 in., S-2-S.
+  2 drawer backs, 3/8 by 7 by 27 in., S-2-S.
+  2 drawer backs, 3/8 by 7 by 13 in., S-2-S.
+  2 drawer bottoms, 3/8 by 15 by 27 in., S-2-S.
+  2 drawer bottoms, 3/8 by 15 by 13 in., S-2-S.
+
+In working up the various parts proceed in the usual manner. If not
+thoroughly familiar with the various tool processes involved, it will be
+necessary to investigate pieces of near-by furniture and to read up some
+good text dealing with the processes involved.
+
+[Illustration: Dresser in Quarter-Sawed Oak]
+
+The exact size of the mirror is 18 by 36 in. and the frame should be
+rabbeted to correspond.
+
+[Illustration: Detail of the Dresser]
+
+For a finish, a coat of paste filler colored so as to give a rich
+golden brown should be applied first. Allow this to harden, after
+rubbing and polishing it in the usual manner, then apply a thin coat of
+shellac. Sand this lightly when hard, and over this apply a coat of
+orange shellac. Over the shellac put several coats of some good rubbing
+wax and polish each coat well. If a striking contrast is wanted for the
+medullary rays of the quartering, apply a golden-oak stain first. Sand
+this lightly, then apply a second coat diluted one-half with solvent and
+sand again lightly. Apply a thin coat of shellac, then, when dry, sand
+lightly and apply paste, and proceed as before.
+
+
+
+
+A MISSION SIDEBOARD
+
+
+Oak is the most suitable material for making this sideboard and it
+should be first-class stock, planed and cut to the dimensions given in
+the following list:
+
+  1 top, 7/8 by 22 by 48 in., S-2-S.
+  1 top shelf, 7/8 by 12 by 48 in., S-2-S.
+  1 bottom, 7/8 by 22 by 48 in., S-2-S.
+  2 back posts, 2 by 2 by 57 in., S-4-S.
+  2 front posts, 2 by 2 by 36 in., S-4-S.
+  2 standards, 2 by 2 by 20 in., S-4-S.
+  2 mirror rails, 7/8 by 2 by 47 in., S-2-S.
+  2 mirror rails, 7/8 by 2 by 20 in., S-2-S.
+  3 front and back rails, 7/8 by 3 by 46 in., S-2-S.
+  4 end rails, 7/8 by 3 by 20 in., S-2-S.
+  4 standard rails, 7/8 by 2 by 10 in., S-2-S.
+  2 vertical pieces, 7/8 by 19-1/2 by 22 in., S-2-S.
+  1 horizontal piece, 7/8 by 22 by 14-1/4 in., S-2-S.
+  1 drawer front, 7/8 by 6 by 14-1/4 in., S-2-S.
+  1 piece, 7/8 by 3 by 3 in.
+  4 vertical door pieces, 7/8 by 2 by 17 in., S-2-S.
+  4 horizontal door pieces, 7/8 by 2 by 15 in., S-2-S.
+  2 drawer sides, 7/8 by 5 by 14 in., S-2-S.
+  1 drawer bottom, 1/4 by 14 by 14-1/4 in., S-2-S.
+  1 back panel, 1/4 by 16-1/2 by 44-1/2 in., S-2-S.
+  2 door panels, 1/4 by 10-1/2 by 15-1/2 in., S-2-S.
+  2 side panels, 1/4 by 18-1/2 by 16-1/2 in., S-2-S.
+
+[Illustration: Detail of the Mission Sideboard]
+
+Begin work by cutting the posts to the length indicated in the detail
+drawing. The top ends are tapered with a 1/2-in. slant. These posts are
+cut in pairs and it is best to stand them up in the same position they
+will be in the finished sideboard, and mark the sides to be mortised
+with a pencil. Also cut the grooves into which the panels are to fit.
+These are to be 1/4 in. wide and a little over 1/4 in. deep.
+
+[Illustration: Mission Sideboard in Quarter-Sawed Oak]
+
+The rails are cut with tenon ends to match the mortises, and also have
+grooves to receive the panels.
+
+The bottom part of the back is closed with a panel and two rails, one at
+the same height from the floor as the front bottom rail, and the top one
+even with the under side of the top. The large panel is for the opening
+thus formed.
+
+These parts are now put together, using plenty of good hot glue, and
+spreading it well on the mortises and tenon ends.
+
+When drawing the frame together with the clamps, care must be taken to
+get it square.
+
+After the glue is hard enough to remove the clamps, the top and bottom
+are put in place. The corners of the top are notched out to fit around
+the posts, while the bottom is cut to fit on the inside of the rails and
+is held in place by putting screws in at an angle through the bottom
+into the rails. The top is also fastened in this way, except that the
+screws are run through the rails into the top.
+
+The two vertical pieces are now put in place. Drive nails through the
+bottom and into these pieces. On the top end use screws driven at an
+angle. Glue may be used if desired.
+
+The doors are made to match these openings. The corners are mitered and
+the backs rabbeted to receive the panels. These panels may be made in
+art glass if so desired.
+
+The horizontal piece for the drawer to rest upon is now put in place and
+fastened by driving nails through the vertical pieces. The drawer is
+made to fit this opening, and it should be lined with velvet to keep the
+silverware in good condition.
+
+The standards and shelves are put on as shown in the drawing. The mirror
+is put in a frame, which is made to fit the back opening and has the
+corners mitered and the back rabbeted to receive the mirror.
+
+Thoroughly scrape and sandpaper all parts that are visible. The
+sideboard is now ready to be finished as desired.
+
+
+
+
+A HALL OR WINDOW SEAT
+
+
+[Illustration: Seat Made of Quarter-Sawed Oak]
+
+A simple design for a hall or window seat is shown in the accompanying
+sketch and detail drawing. Anyone who has a few sharp tools, and is at
+all handy with them, can make this useful and attractive piece of
+furniture in a few spare hours. Quarter-sawed oak is the best wood to
+use in its construction, as it looks best when finished and is easy to
+procure. If the stock is ordered from the mill ready cut to length,
+squared and sanded, much of the labor will be saved. The following is a
+list of the material needed:
+
+  4 corner posts, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 28 in., S-4-S.
+  2 side rails, 3/4 by 2-1/2 by 36-1/2 in., S-4-S.
+  2 end rails, 3/4 by 4 by 14-1/2 in., S-4-S.
+  2 side braces, 1 by 1 by 36-1/2 in., S-4-S.
+  2 end braces, 1 by 1 by 14-1/2 in. S-4-S.
+  1 seat, 1 by 16 by 35-3/4 in., S-4-S.
+  2 top end braces, 3/4 by 2 by 14-1/2 in., S-4-S.
+  6 slats, 3/4 by 2 by 6-1/2 in., S-4-S.
+
+Square up the four posts and lay out the mortises according to the
+drawing. To do this, lay them on a flat surface with the ends square and
+mark them with a try-square. The tenons on the end and side rails are
+laid out in the same manner as the posts. The end rails should be marked
+and mortises cut for the upright slats as shown in the detail drawing.
+Fit the end and side braces with mortise and tenon joints.
+
+The two end frames can now be glued and clamped together and set away to
+dry. Put all the parts together before gluing to see that they fit
+square and tight.
+
+The seat should be made of one piece if possible, otherwise two or more
+boards will have to be glued together. The corners should be cut out to
+fit around the posts. It rests on the side rails and cleats fastened to
+the inner side of the end rails.
+
+When the window seat is complete go over it carefully and scrape all the
+surplus glue from about the joints, as the finish will not take where
+there is any glue. Remove all rough spots with fine sandpaper, then
+apply the stain best liked, which may be any one of the many mission
+stains supplied by the trade for this purpose. If this window seat is
+well made and finished, it will be an ornament to any home.
+
+[Illustration: Detail of the Hall or Window Seat]
+
+
+
+
+A MISSION PLANT STAND
+
+
+For the mission plant stand shown in the illustration secure the
+following list of quarter-sawed white-oak stock, cut and finished to
+size:
+
+  1 top, 3/4 by 15-1/2 by 15-1/2 in., S-2-S.
+  4 posts, 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 20 in., S-4-S.
+  4 rails, 3/4 by 3 by 11 in., S-2-S.
+  2 rails, 3/4 by 2 by 11 in., S-2-S.
+  1 shelf, 3/4 by 6 by 10 in., S-2-S.
+  4 slats, 1/4 by 2 by 12-1/4 in., S-2-S.
+  2 slats, 1/4 by 2 by 12-3/4 in., S-2-S.
+
+Test all surfaces of the posts with a try-square to see that they are
+square with each other. Lay out the tenons on the ends of the rails as
+shown in the sketch and cut with a tenon saw and chisel. Arrange the
+posts and rails as they are to stand and number each tenon and mortise.
+Lay out the mortises in the legs, taking the measurements directly from
+the tenon which is to fit that mortise. Cut the mortises, first having
+bored to the depth with a 1/4-in. bit.
+
+[Illustration: Detail of the Plant Stand]
+
+The slats should now be made and mortised into the top rail 1/4 in. They
+come outside of the lower rail and are held to it with two small brads,
+fancy-headed tacks, or round-head screws.
+
+In laying out the mortises for the lower rails, care must be taken to
+have them set 1/8 in. farther in than the upper rails so the slats may
+come outside.
+
+Set up the stand without glue or screws to see that all pieces fit
+accurately. Then glue up the sides with the slats first. After these
+have set for 24 hours, fit in the other two rails and the shelf. Three
+flat-head screws should be used to hold the shelf in place. These must
+be placed so the slats will cover them when they are attached.
+
+[Illustration: Complete Plant Stand]
+
+When this work is completed it is ready for the top. A good method of
+attaching the top is shown in the sketch. The screws used for fastening
+should be 2-in. No. 10. Bore into the rail 1-1/2 in. with a bit 1/16 in.
+larger than the head of the screw. Then bore through the rest of the way
+with a bit a little larger than the shank of the screw. Thus a little
+space is left for expansion and shrinkage of the top.
+
+Scrape and sandpaper thoroughly to remove all marks or glue spots.
+Finish with two coats of weathered-oak stain, followed by two coats of
+black wax.
+
+
+
+
+A BEDSIDE MEDICINE STAND
+
+
+The accompanying sketch and detail drawing show a design of a bedside
+stand. This is a very desirable piece of furniture and is simple and
+easy to make. Quarter-sawed oak is the best wood to use in its
+construction. The material should be ordered from the mill ready cut to
+length, squared and sanded. The following list of material will be
+required:
+
+  4 posts, 1-3/4 by 1-3/4 by 33 in., S-4-S.
+  1 top board, 1 by 19 by 19 in., S-4-S.
+  3 intermediate boards, 3/4 by 15-1/2 by 17 in., S-4-S.
+  2 side boards, 3/4 by 5 by 15-1/2 in., S-4-S.
+  1 back board, 3/4 by 4-1/4 by 14-1/2 in., S-4-S.
+  4 side rails, 3/4 by 2 by 16 in., S-4-S.
+  1 door, 3/4 by 9 by 14-1/2 in., S-4-S.
+  1 back board, 3/4 by 10-1/4 by 14-1/2 in., S-4-S.
+  2 panels, 3/8 by 9-1/2 by 15 in., S-4-S.
+  6 slats, 1/4 by 1 by 8-3/4 in., S-4-S.
+  1 drawer front, 3/4 by 4-1/4 by 14-1/2 in., S-4-S.
+  2 sides for drawer, 1/2 by 4-1/4 by 16 in., S-4-S.
+  1 back for drawer, 1/2 by 4-1/4 by 13-1/2 in., soft wood.
+  1 bottom for drawer, 1/2 by 13-1/2 by 15 in., soft wood.
+
+[Illustration: Medicine Stand in Quarter-Sawed Oak]
+
+Start work on the four posts by rounding the top corners and shaping the
+feet as shown. The four posts are identical and the mortises should be
+laid out on all four at once so as to get them all alike. These should
+be carefully cut with a sharp chisel. On the inner surface of each leg
+cut a groove to hold the side boards of the lower compartment. Next
+prepare the two wide and the four narrow crosspieces, tenoning them to
+fit the mortises already cut in the legs. The lower crosspieces should
+also have grooves cut in them to hold the side boards of the
+compartment. The two complete sides can now be glued and clamped
+together and set away to dry. While they are drying the remaining parts
+of the stand can be made. The three horizontal boards are now made by
+notching out the corners to fit around the legs. They are supported by
+fastening small cleats to the inner surface of each crosspiece.
+
+[Illustration: Detail of the Medicine Stand]
+
+The two ends can now be set up and connected. Notch out the corners of
+the top board and fit it in place. The top is fastened down by means of
+screws set in at an angle from below. The back boards can be of soft
+wood and are fastened in place in the usual manner. The door should be
+of one piece if possible and should have suitable hinges and a catch.
+
+Make and fit the drawer in place, and the stand is ready for the finish.
+First scrape all the surplus glue from about the points so the stain
+will not be kept from the wood. Finish smooth with fine sandpaper, then
+apply stain of the color desired.
+
+
+
+
+A MISSION HALL CHAIR
+
+
+This hall chair is designed to take up as little room as possible. For
+its construction the following stock will be needed:
+
+  1 back, 7/8 by 14 by 44 in., S-2-S.
+  2 sides, 7/8 by 14 by 17 in., S-2-S.
+  1 seat, 7/8 by 14 by 14 in., S-2-S.
+  1 stretcher, 7/8 by 6 by 16 in., S-2-S.
+  1 brace, 7/8 by 5 by 11 in., S-2-S.
+  1 piece, 7/8 by 7/8 by 44 in., for cleats.
+
+These dimensions are for finished pieces, therefore 1/4 in. should be
+allowed for planing if the stock cannot be secured finished.
+
+Lay out and cut the design on the back, sides, and brace. To cut the
+openings, first bore a hole near one corner to get the blade of a coping
+saw through and proceed to saw to the lines. Smooth the edges after
+sawing by taking a thin shaving with a sharp chisel. A file will not
+leave a good surface.
+
+Mark the tenons on the ends of the stretcher and cut them with a backsaw
+and make smooth with a chisel. From the tenons mark the mortises in the
+sides through which they are to pass.
+
+[Illustration: Detail of the Hall Chair]
+
+[Illustration: Complete Hall Chair in Plain Oak]
+
+To cut these mortises, first bore a row of holes with a 5/8 in. bit,
+boring halfway from each side so as not to split off any pieces. Now
+make of scrap material the two keys and from them mark the small
+mortises in the tenons.
+
+Before putting the chair together, the cleats for holding the seat
+should be fastened to the sides, back and brace. Use flat-head screws
+for this purpose. Then put the sides and stretcher together, and fasten
+the back to the sides with flat-head screws.
+
+The brace should be put in next, using three round-head screws in each
+end. There only remains the top, which is held by screws through the
+cleats from the under side.
+
+Stain with two coats of weathered or mission-oak stain, and then apply a
+thin coat of "under-lac" or shellac and two coats of wax.
+
+[Illustration]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+       *     *     *     *     *
+
+Transcriber's Notes:
+
+Table of Contents was moved to the front of the doument
+Bold text in the original manuscript is indicated with "$...$"
+Folio 84: "Chipppendale" changed to "Chippendale".
+Folio 90: "2 drawer ends 7/8 x ? x 7-1/2" was changed to an assumed
+  5-1/2 from context of the illustration.
+A table of contents was added to the front of the text.
+A list of illustrations was added to the front of the text.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Mission Furniture, by H. H. Windsor
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MISSION FURNITURE ***
+
+***** This file should be named 23770.txt or 23770.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/3/7/7/23770/
+
+Produced by K. Nordquist, Ross Wilburn and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/23770.zip b/23770.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a980da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/23770.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..46b2bab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #23770 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/23770)
author	Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org>	2025-10-15 02:10:02 -0700
committer	Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org>	2025-10-15 02:10:02 -0700
commit	968d5a00099759360b1055baa8d5bcc6636d5e2f (patch)
tree	0d1eb7cccdd91eac9f9095039591dcef8763440c